You are on page 1of 176

Microwave Digital Radios

TRuepoi nt

5000 & 4040


Oper at or I nt er f ace
i i Har r i s St r at ex Net w or k s

TRuepoi nt

5000 & 4040 Oper at or I nt er f ace Manual


I MN- 903003- E07 June 2008
This manual incorporates features and functions provided with the TRuepoint

5000 or TRuepoint


4040.
Cop yr igh t 20 0 8 by Ha r r is St r a t ex Net wor ks , I n c.
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a
retrieval system, or translated into any language or computer language, in any form or by any means,
electronic, magnetic, optical, chemical, manual or otherwise, without the prior written permission of
Harris Stratex Networks Inc. To request permission, contact techpubs@hstx.com.
Copyright (c) 1995-2000 GoAhead Software, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Wa r r a n t y
Harris Stratex Networks makes no representation or warranties with respect to the contents hereof and
specifically disclaims any implied warranties or merchantability or fitness for any particular purpose.
Further, Harris Stratex Networks reserves the right to revise this publication and to make changes from
time to time in the content hereof without obligation of Harris Stratex Networks to notify any person of
such revision or changes.
Sa fet y Recom m en d a t ion s
The following safety recommendations must be considered to avoid injuries to persons and/ or damage
to the equipment:
1. Installation and Service Personnel: Installation and service must be carried out by authorized
personnel who have the technical training and experience necessary to be aware of any hazardous
operations during installation and service, and of measures to avoid any danger to themselves, to
any other personnel, and to the equipment.
2. Access to the Equipment: Access to the equipment in use must be restricted to service personnel
only.
3. Safety Norms: Recommended safety norms are detailed in the Health and Safety sections of this
manual. Local safety regulations must be used if mandatory. Safety instructions in this document
should be used in addition to the local safety regulations. In the case of conflict between safety
instructions stated in this manual and those indicated in local regulations, mandatory local norms
will prevail. Should local regulations not be mandatory, then the safety norms in Chapt er 1 will
prevail.
4. Service Personnel Skill: Service personnel must have received adequate technical training on
telecommunications and in particular on the equipment this manual refers to.
Tr a d em a r ks
All trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
I MN- 903003- E07 June 2008 i i i
TRuepoi nt

5000 & 4040 Oper at or I nt er f ace


Cont act I nf or mat i on
Sa les a n d Sa les Su p p or t :
For sales information, contact one of the Harris Stratex Networks headquarters, or find your regional
sales office at h t t p : / / www. h a r r is s t r a t ex. com / con t a ct .
Cu s t om er Ser vice:
For customer service, contact one of the regional Technical Help Desks listed below.
Or you can contact your local Harris Stratex Networks office. Contact information is available on our
website at: www. h a r r is s t r a t ex. com / s u p p or t / con t a ct -s u p p or t . a s p
Cor por at e Headquar t er s
Nor t h Car ol i na, USA
I nt er nat i onal Headquar t er s
Si ngapor e
Har r i s St r at ex Net w or k s, I nc.
Research Triangle Park
637 Davis Drive
Morrisville, Nort h Carolina 27560
Unit ed St at es
Phone: + 1 919- 767- 3230
Fax : + 1 919- 767- 3233
Tol l Fr ee f or Sal es I nqui r i es:
+ 1 888- HSTX- NOW ( 888- 478- 9669)
Har r i s St r at ex Net w or k s ( S) Pt e. Lt d.
17, Changi Business Park Cent ral 1
Honeywell Building, # 04- 01
Singapore 486073
Phone: + 65 6496 0900
Fax : + 65 6496 0999
Sal es I nqui r i es:
+ 1- 321- 674- 4252
Amer i cas Techni cal Hel p
Desk
EMEA Techni cal Hel p Desk Asi a Paci f i c Techni cal Hel p
Tesk
Harris St rat ex Net works
120 Rose Orchard Way
San Jose, CA 95134
U. S. A.
Harris St rat ex Net works
4 Bell Drive
Hamilt on I nt ernat ional
Technology Park
Blant yre, Glasgow, Scot land
G72 0FB
Unit ed Kingdom
Harris St rat ex Net works
Bldg 10, Unit B
Philexcel I ndust rial Park
Clark Special Economic Zone
Clark Field, Pampanga
Philippines
Phone: + 1 408 944 3565
Toll- free in US:
+ 1 800 227 8332
Fax : + 1 408 944 1159
Phone: + 44 1698 714 073
Fax : + 44 1698 717 204
Phone: + 63 45 599 5192
Fax : + 63 45 599 5196
TAC.AM@hst x .com
TAC. EMEA@hst x .com TAC. ACPAC@hst x . com
i v Har r i s St r at ex Net w or k s

WEEE Dir ect ive
In accordance with the WEEE Directive (2002/ 96/ EC), TRuepoint

5000 is marked with the following


symbol:
This symbol indicates that this equipment should be collected separately for the purposes of recovery
and/ or recycling. For information about collection and recycling of Harris Stratex Networks see
www. harrisst rat ex. com/ about / compliance/ weee/ or contact your local Harris Stratex Networks
sales office. If you purchased your product via a distributor please contact the distributor for
information regarding collection and recovery/ recycling. This directive is applicable to the European
Union.
(WEEE is the acronym for Waste electrical and electronic equipment.)
RoHS Dir ect ive
The RoHS Directive (2002/ 95/ EC) was implemented on 1 J uly, 2006. All TRuepoint

5000 shipments
to countries that have adopted this legislation meet the requirements of the RoHS Directive.
I MN- 903003- E07 June 2008 v
TRuepoi nt

5000 & 4040 Oper at or I nt er f ace


RoHS Com p lia n ce: Ch in a
Material Disclosure Table of Hazardous Substances or Elements

Toxic or Hazardous Substances and Elements



Part
name

Lead
(Pb)

Mercury
(Hg)

Cadmium
(Cd)

Hexavalent
Chromium
(Cr
6+
)

Polybrominated
biphenyls
(PBB)

Polybrominated
diphenyl ethers
(PBDE)

RFU X O O O O O
SPU Shelf X O O O O O
Modems X O O O O O
Muxes X O O O O O
Controller
Card
X O O O O O
Relay/
Alarm
Card
X O O O O O
Orderwire
Card
X O O O O O
64Kbps
Card
X O O O O O
10 100
Base-T/
64Kbps
Card
X O O O O O
O: Indicates that this toxic or hazardous substance contained in all of the homogenous
materials for this part is below the limit requirement in SJ/T11363-2006.
OSJ/T11363-2006

X: Indicates that this toxic or hazardous contained in at least one of the homogenous
materials used for this part is above the limit requirement in SJ/T11363-2006.
XSJ/T11363-2006

vi Har r i s St r at ex Net w or k s

Decla r a t ion of Con for m it y, R&TTE Dir ect ive, 19 9 9 / 5/ EC
esky
[Czech]
Harris Stratex Networks tmto prohlauje, e tento point-to-point radio je ve shod se zkladnmi
poadavky a dalmi pslunmi ustanovenmi smrnice 1999/5/ES.
Dansk
[Danish]
Undertegnede Harris Stratex Networks erklrer herved, at flgende udstyr point-to-point radio
overholder de vsentlige krav og vrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.
Deutsch
[German]
Hiermit erklrt Harris Stratex Networks, dass sich das Gert point-to-point radio in bereinstimmung mit
den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den brigen einschlgigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie
1999/5/EG befindet.
Eesti
[Estonian]
Kesolevaga kinnitab Harris Stratex Networks seadme point-to-point radio vastavust direktiivi 1999/5/E
phinuetele ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele teistele asjakohastele stetele.
English
Hereby, Harris Stratex Networks declares that this point-to-point radio is in compliance with the essential
requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.
Espaol
[Spanish]
Por medio de la presente Harris Stratex Networks declara que el point-to-point radio cumple con los
requisitos esenciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999/5/CE.

[Greek]
Harris Stratex Networks point-to-point radio
1999/5/.
Franais
[French]
Par la prsente Harris Stratex Networks dclare que l'appareil point-to-point radio est conforme aux
exigences essentielles et aux autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/CE.
Italiano
[Italian]
Con la presente Harris Stratex Networks dichiara che questo point-to-point radio conforme ai requisiti
essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE.
Latviski
[Latvian]
Ar o Harris Stratex Networks deklar, ka point-to-point radio atbilst Direktvas 1999/5/EK btiskajm
prasbm un citiem ar to saisttajiem noteikumiem.
Lietuvi
[Lithuanian]
iuo Harris Stratex Networks deklaruoja, kad is point-to-point radio atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir
kitas 1999/5/EB Direktyvos nuostatas.
Nederlands
[Dutch]
Hierbij verklaart Harris Stratex Networks dat het toestel point-to-point radio in overeenstemming is met
de essentile eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EG.
Malti
[Maltese]
Hawnhekk, Harris Stratex Networks, jiddikjara li dan point-to-point radio jikkonforma mal-tiijiet
essenzjali u ma provvedimenti orajn relevanti li hemm fid-Dirrettiva 1999/5/EC.
Magyar
[Hungarian]
Alulrott, Harris Stratex Networks nyilatkozom, hogy a point-to-point radio megfelel a vonatkoz alapvet
kvetelmnyeknek s az 1999/5/EC irnyelv egyb elrsainak.
Polski
[Polish]
Niniejszym Harris Stratex Networks owiadcza, e point-to-point radio jest zgodny z zasadniczymi
wymogami oraz pozostaymi stosownymi postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999/5/EC.
Portugus
[Portuguese]
Harris Stratex Networks declara que este point-to-point radio est conforme com os requisitos essenciais
e outras disposies da Directiva 1999/5/CE.
Slovensko
[Slovenian]
Harris Stratex Networks izjavlja, da je ta point-to-point radio v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi
relevantnimi doloili direktive 1999/5/ES.
Slovensky
[Slovak]
Harris Stratex Networks tmto vyhlasuje, e point-to-point radio spa zkladn poiadavky a vetky
prslun ustanovenia Smernice 1999/5/ES.
Suomi
[Finnish]
Harris Stratex Networks vakuuttaa tten ett point-to-point radio tyyppinen laite on direktiivin 1999/5/EY
oleellisten vaatimusten ja sit koskevien direktiivin muiden ehtojen mukainen.
Svenska
[Swedish]
Hrmed intygar Harris Stratex Networks att denna point-to-point radio str I verensstmmelse med de
vsentliga egenskapskrav och vriga relevanta bestmmelser som framgr av direktiv 1999/5/EG.
slenska
[Icelandic]
Hr me lsir Harris Stratex Networks yfir v a point-to-point radio er samrmi vi grunnkrfur og
arar krfur, sem gerar eru tilskipun 1999/5/EC.
Norsk
[Norwegian]
Harris Stratex Networks erklrer herved at utstyret point-to-point radio er i samsvar med de
grunnleggende krav og vrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.
T
R
u
e
p
o
i
n
t


5
0
0
0

&

4
0
4
0

O
p
e
r
a
t
o
r

I
n
t
e
r
f
a
c
e
I
M
N
-
9
0
3
0
0
3
-
E
0
7

J
u
n
e

2
0
0
8

v
i
i
The TRuepoint 5000 radio is classified under the R&TTE Directive 99/ 5/ EC as a class 2.8 radio (microwave fixed link) product. Point-to-point radio
relay equipment is intended to be used for interconnecting typically private and public networks and for interconnecting mobile base stations back to
the PSTN point of presence (POP).
For details of where the equipment is intended to be used, refer to the country matrix below. It should be noted that a licence to operate this apparatus
is likely to be necessary and the appropriate regulatory administration should be contacted.
Harris Stratex Networks intends to market this equipment where a cross (X) is shown.
Not e: The information contained in this document has been gathered from the relevant government authorities and relates only to European
countries participating in the R&TTE Directive.
A
u
s
t
r
i
a
B
e
l
g
i
u
m
B
u
l
g
a
r
i
a
C
y
p
r
u
s
C
z
e
c
h

R
e
p
u
D
e
n
m
a
r
k
E
s
t
o
n
i
a
F
i
n
l
a
n
d
F
r
a
n
c
e
G
e
r
m
a
n
y
G
r
e
e
c
e
H
u
n
g
a
r
y
I
c
e
l
a
n
d
I
r
e
l
a
n
d
I
t
a
l
y
L
a
t
v
i
a
L
i
t
h
u
a
n
i
a
L
u
x
e
m
b
o
u
r
g
M
a
l
t
a
N
e
t
h
e
r
l
a
n
d
s
N
o
r
w
a
y
P
o
l
a
n
d
P
o
r
t
u
g
a
l
R
o
m
a
n
i
a
S
l
o
v
a
k

R
e
p
u
S
l
o
v
e
n
i
a
S
p
a
i
n
S
w
e
d
e
n
S
w
i
t
z
e
r
l
a
n
d
U
n
i
t
e
d

K
i
n
g
d
L6GHz X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
U6GHz X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
7GHz X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
8GHz X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
10GHz X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
11GHz X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
13GHz X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
15GHz X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
18GHz X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
23GHz X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
26GHz X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
38GHz X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
vi i i Har r i s St r at ex Net w or k s

WARNI NG
Making adj ust ment s and/ or modificat ions t o t his equipment t hat are not in
accordance wit h t he provisions of t his inst ruct ion manual or ot her
supplement ary document at ion may result in personal inj ury or damage t o
t he equipment , and may void t he equipment warrant y.
AVERTI SSEMENT
Tout rglage ou modificat ion fait s cet quipement hors du cadre dict
par ce guide dut ilisat ion ou par t out e aut re document at ion supplment aire
pourraient causer des blessures ou endommager lquipement et peut
ent raner lannulat ion de sa garant ie.
WARNUNG
Die an diesen Gert en gemacht e Einst ellungen und/ oder nderungen,
welche nicht gem dieser Bedienungsanleit ung, oder gem anderen
zust zlichen Anleit ungen, ausgefhrt werden, knnen Verlet zungen oder
Mat erialschden zur Folge haben und event uell die Garant ie unglt ig
machen.
ATENCI N
Llevar a cabo aj ust amient os y/ o modificaciones a est e equipo, sin seguir
las inst rucciones provist as por est e manual u ot ro document o adicional,
podra result ar en lesiones a su persona o daos al equipo, y anular la
garant a de est e lt imo.
I MN- 903003- E07 June 2008 i x
Cont ent s
CHAPTER 1, I NTRODUCTI ON
Scope of t his Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1- 1
Using t his Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1- 1
St ruct ure of t his Manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1- 2
Relat ed Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1- 3
Healt h and Safet y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1- 4
General Healt h and Safet y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1- 4
Operat or Healt h and Safet y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1- 5
General Hazards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1- 5
CHAPTER 2, TOOLS & FEATURES
Syst em Configurat ion/ Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2- 1
Web- CI T. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2- 1
Harris St rat ex Net works Keypad or VT- 100 Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2- 1
E- Keypad. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2- 1
Net com . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2- 2
Net Boss XE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2- 2
ProVision
. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 2- 3
FarScan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2- 3
Paperless Chart Recorder ( PCR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2- 3
Event Log Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2- 4
Soft ware Download/ Upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2- 4
Soft ware Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2- 4
Microwave Soft ware Upgrade Ut ilit y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2- 4
Configurat ion Transfer Ut ilit y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2- 4
CHAPTER 3, CONFI GURI NG AND OPERATI NG THE RADI O
Cont rol and Monit oring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3- 1
Soft ware Compat ibilit y & Feat ures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3- 1
Using t he hand- held/ VT- 100 t erminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3- 2
Connect ing t o t he Radio: Hand- Held or PC/ VT- 100 Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3- 2
Configuring and Operat ing t he Radio: Hand- Held or PC/ VT- 100 Terminal . . . . . . . . . . 3- 4
Using t he Web- CI T. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3- 7
Securit y Considerat ions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3- 7
Connect ing t o t he Radio: TRuepoint Web- CI T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3- 8
Configuring and Operat ing t he Radio: TRuepoint Web- CI T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3- 11
Configurat ion Det ails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3- 13
NE Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3- 13
Tx & RX Frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3- 14
Capacit y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3- 15
Prot ect ion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3- 16
Channel Bandwidt h . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3- 17
Tr ibut aries/ Wayside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3- 21
TPC Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3- 28
Securit y. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3- 30
x Har r i s St r at ex Net w or k s

Addit ional Web- CI T Opt ions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3- 36
Tr ansmit t er Swit ching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3- 36
Opt ional Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3- 37
Syst em I nformat ion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3- 37
Dat a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3- 38
Time Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3- 39
Net work Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3- 40
Net work Configurat ion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3- 41
Rout ing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3- 43
Dat a Tr ansmission Prot ocols. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3- 43
SNMP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3- 45
CHAPTER 4, UPGRADES
I nt roduct ion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4- 1
Microwave Soft ware Upgrade Ut ilit y. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4- 2
Single- host Upgrade. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4- 4
Direct Flash Upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4- 6
ESCAN Upgrade. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4- 10
Configurat ion Backup/ Rest ore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4- 12
Cust omizat ion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4- 14
Soft ware Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4- 16
Configurat ion Transfer Ut ilit y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4- 18
Creat e a new Flash Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4- 19
Tr ansferring Configurat ion Dat a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4- 19
Creat ing & Transferring at t he same t ime. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4- 21
CHAPTER 5, TROUBLESHOOTI NG
LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5- 1
Mixed Mode MUX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5- 2
Loopback Test ing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5- 2
Modem I F Loopback Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5- 3
High Level Mux Local Loopback Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5- 3
Tr ibut ary or STM1/ OC3 Loopback Test s. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5- 3
Wayside Loopback Test s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5- 5
Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5- 7
BER Test ing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5- 7
Et hernet St at ist ics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5- 7
Event Log Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5- 7
Locks & Swit ches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5- 11
Relays & Ext ernal Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5- 11
Trap Cust omizat ion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5- 13
Web- CI T. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5- 13
Glossary of Alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5- 14
I MN- 903003- E07 June 2008 x i
TRuepoi nt

5000 & 4040 Oper at or I nt er f ace


CHAPTER 6, SOFTWARE MENU TREE
CHAPTER 7, MENU I TEM GLOSSARY
CHAPTER 8, GLOSSARY
APPENDI X A, NXE1/ DS1+ 2X10/ 100BASE- T MUX SET- UP
Hardware. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A- 1
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A- 1
Soft ware. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A- 8
Used Capacit y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A- 8
Tr ibut aries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A- 8
Et hernet Port s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A- 9
QoS Mapping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A- 12
APPENDI X B, ETHERNET THROUGHPUT MEASUREMENT PROCEDURE
I nt roduct ion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B- 1
Configuring I P addressing and flow cont rol on PCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B- 3
Procedure t o set an I P address . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B- 3
Procedure t o set t he flow cont rol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B- 5
Ping remot e PC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B- 9
Measuring t hroughput wit h t he Net perf ut ilit y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B- 10
Net perf t hroughput VS Et hernet t hroughput . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B- 12
I NDEX
x i i Har r i s St r at ex Net w or k s

I MN- 903003- E07 June 2008 1- 1
Chapt er 1. I nt r oduct i on
Scope of t hi s Manual
This manual explains how to operate the TRuepoint 5000 or 4040 radio system. It
describes the tools used to control and monitor the system as well as providing details
on configuration, upgrades, and troubleshooting. It explains how to accomplish the
various tasks that the operator will be required to perform.
This document is subj ect t o change wit hout not ice.
Usi ng t hi s Manual
This manual has been optimized for fast Web viewing, and text shown in t his format
identifies navigation links leading to locations that are internal or external to the
manual.
You would normally use t his manual aft er complet ing t he 5000 RFU
I nst al l at i on and SPU I nst al l at i on manuals or t he 4040 Radi o
I nst al l at i on manual. This manual provides informat ion specific t o t he
Operat or I nt erface.
1- 2 Har r i s St r at ex Net w or k s
Chapt er 1. I nt r oduct i on
St r uct ur e of t hi s Manual
Besides this introductory Chapter, this Manual contains the following:
Chapt er 2, Tool s & Feat ur es
Identification and functional description of available tools for using the TRuepoint
system and software.
Chapt er 3, Conf i gur i ng and Oper at i ng t he Radi o
Provides steps for using the hand-held terminal, VT-100 emulation, or the Web-CIT to
access and configure the software.
Chapt er 4, Upgr ades
Steps for upgrading software and firmware.
Chapt er 5, Tr oubl eshoot i ng
Defines the LEDs and contains a list of alarms to aid in troubleshooting.
Chapt er 6, Sof t w ar e Menu Tr ee
A complete list of the software menus in the hand-held terminal or VT-100 emulation.
Chapt er 7, Menu I t em Gl ossar y
Provides a brief description of items in the software menu tree and/ or Web- CI T.
Chapt er 8, Gl ossar y
Compilation of common and special terms and their definitions, where appropriate
used throughout the TRuepoint

user documentation.
Appendi x A, Nx E1/ DS1+ 2x 10/ 100BASE- T MUX Set - Up
Step-by-step procedure for upgrading and setting up a Mixed Mode MUX.
Appendi x B, Et her net Thr oughput Measur ement Pr ocedur e
Describes how to measure the layer 3 throughput over a single hop of TRuepoint 5000
using the NetPerf application.
I MN- 903003- E07 June 2008 1- 3
TRuepoi nt

5000 & 4040 Oper at or I nt er f ace


Rel at ed Manual s
Manual P/ N Ti t l e Comment s
Top Level
I MN- 903000- Exx Syst em Descript ion Top level document providing a broad
overview of t he TRuepoint

5000 plat form.


I ncludes Theory of Operat ion, General
Specificat ions, and Performance Tables.
or
I MN- 904106- Exx Syst em Descript ion Top level document providing a broad
overview of t he TRuepoint

4040 plat form.


I ncludes Theory of Operat ion, General
Specificat ions, and Performance Tables.
User Manual s: Har dw ar e ( recommended order of use)
I MN- 903001- Exx RFU I nst allat ion Provides inst ruct ions for inst alling t he TR
5000 RFU. I t also provides informat ion on
cabling connect ions t o t he SPU, grounding
guidelines, and basic t roubleshoot ing
informat ion.
I MN- 903002- Exx SPU I nst allat ion Provides inst ruct ions for inst alling t he TR
5000 SPU and it s component s ( modules) . I t
also provides general set up and basic
t roubleshoot ing informat ion.
or
I MN- 904107- Exx RFU I nst allat ion Provides inst ruct ions for inst alling t he TR
4040 radio t erminal. I t also provides
informat ion on cabling connect ions t o t he
SPU, general set up, grounding guidelines, and
basic t roubleshoot ing informat ion.
User Manual s: Sof t w ar e
I MN- 903003- Exx Operat ors I nt erface This document .
QRC- 903000- Exx Quick Reference Card Provides a graphical represent at ion of t he
TRuepoint

soft ware menus.


1- 4 Har r i s St r at ex Net w or k s
Chapt er 1. I nt r oduct i on
Heal t h and Saf et y
All personnel must comply with the relevant health and safety practices when working
on or around the TRuepoint

5000 or 4040 radio equipment.


Local safet y regulat ions must be used if mandat ory. Safet y inst ruct ions
in t his chapt er should be used in addit ion t o t he local safet y r egulat ions.
I n t he case of conflict bet ween safet y inst ruct ions st at ed herein and
t hose indicat ed in local regulat ions, mandat ory local norms will prevail.
Should local regulat ions not be mandat ory, t hen safet y norms herein will
prevail.
Gener al Heal t h and Saf et y
The following table describes general health and safety information about the
TRuepoint

radio.
Table 1-1. General Healt h and Safet y
Topi c I nf or mat i on
Flammabilit y The equipment is designed and const ruct ed t o minimize t he risk of smoke and
fumes during a fire.
Hazardous
Mat erials
No hazardous mat erials are used in t he const ruct ion of t his equipment .
Hazardous
Volt age
The TRuepoint

syst em meet s global product safet y requirement s for safet y


ext ra- low volt age ( SELV) rat ed equipment where t he input volt age must be
48 V nominal, 60 V maximum.
Safet y Signs Ext ernal warning signs or ot her indicat ors on t he equipment are not required.
Surface
Temperat ures
The ext ernal equipment surfaces become warm during operat ion, due t o heat
dissipat ion. However, t he t emperat ures reached are not considered
hazardous.
I MN- 903003- E07 June 2008 1- 5
TRuepoi nt

5000 & 4040 Oper at or I nt er f ace


Oper at or Heal t h and Saf et y
The following table describes the precautions that relate to installing or working on the
TRuepoint

radio.
Table 1-2. Operat or Healt h and Safet y
Gener al Hazar ds
The following table describes the general hazards that must be addressed when
planning and installing a TRuepoint

system.
Topi c I nf or mat i on
Equipment
Prot rusions
The equipment has been designed t o be free of unnecessary prot rusions or
sharp surfaces t hat may cat ch or ot herwise cause inj ury during handling.
However, always t ake care when working on or around t he equipment .
Laser and Fiber
Opt ic Cable
Hazards
TRuepoint

5000 fiber opt ic t ransmit t ers comply t o FDDI PMD ATM/ SONET
st andards and present no danger t o personnel in normal use. However:
Do not look int o act ive t erminat ed opt ical port s or fibers. I f visual
inspect ions is required ensure t he equipment is t urned off or, if a fiber
cable, disconnect t he far end.
Follow t he manufact urers inst ruct ions when using an opt ical t est set .
I ncorrect calibrat ion or cont rol set t ings could result in hazardous levels of
radiat ion.
Prot ect / cover unconnect ed opt ical fiber connect ors wit h dust caps. Place all
opt ical fiber cut t ings in a suit able cont ainer for safe disposal. Bare fibers and
fiber scraps can easily penet rat e t he skin and eyes.
Lift ing
Equipment
Be careful when hoist ing or lift ing t he RFU or it s ant enna during inst allat ion or
maint enance.
The RFU 5100 weighs around 13 lbs ( 6 kg) . However, ant ennas wit h t heir
mount ing hardware can weigh in excess of 220 lbs ( 100 kg) and require
specialized lift ing equipment and an operat or t rained and cert ified in it s use.
Prot ect ion from
RF Exposure
The TRuepoint

radio does not generat e RF fields int ense enough t o cause RF


burns. However, when inst alling, servicing or inspect ing an ant enna always
comply wit h t he Prot ect ion from RF Exposure guidelines under General
Hazards.
Safet y Warnings When a pract ice or procedure poses implied or pot ent ial harm t o t he user or
t o t he radio equipment , a warning is included in t his manual.
1- 6 Har r i s St r at ex Net w or k s
Chapt er 1. I nt r oduct i on
Table 1-3. General Hazards
Topi c I nf or mat i on
Airflow
Requirement s
Rack inst allat ions must be made so t he airflow required for safe and correct
operat ion of TRuepoint

is not compromised.
Circuit
Overloading
When connect ing t he TRuepoint

, det ermine t he effect t his will have on t he


power supply circuit prot ect ion devices, and supply wiring. Check
TRuepoint

power consumpt ion specificat ions and t he supply capabilit y of


t he power supply syst em. This check of capacit y must ext end t o t he DC
power supply and not j ust t o an int ermediat e connect ion point .
TRuepoint

SPU
Eart hing
The TRuepoint

SPU eart h must be connect ed direct ly t o t he DC supply


syst em eart hing conduct or, or t o a bonding j umper from an eart hing t erminal
bar, or bus t o which t he DC supply syst em eart hing is connect ed.
ESD ESD ( elect rost at ic discharge) can damage elect ronic component s. Even if
component s remain funct ional, ESD can cause lat ent damage t hat result s in
premat ure failure. Always wear proper ESD grounding st raps when changing
or handling t he plug- in modules.
Prot ect ion from
RF Exposure
When inst alling, servicing or inspect ing an ant enna always comply wit h t he
following:
Locat e t he ant enna such t hat it does not infringe t he RF Exposure LI mit
Dist ance, relat ing t o t he Compliance Boundary General Public ( m) .
St ay aware of t he pot ent ial risk of RF exposure and t ake appropriat e
precaut ions.
Do not st and in front of or look int o an ant enna wit hout first ensuring t he
associat ed t ransmit t er or t ransmit t ers are swit ched off.
At a mult i- ant enna sit e ask t he sit e owner or operat or for det ails of ot her
radio services act ive at t he sit e and for t heir requirement s/
recommendat ions for prot ect ion against pot ent ially harmful exposure t o
RF radiat ion.
When it is not possible t o swit ch t ransmit t ers off at a mult i- ant enna sit e
and t here is pot ent ial for exposure t o harmful levels of RF radiat ion, wear
a prot ect ive suit .
Do not look int o t he waveguide port of an RFU when t he radio is act ive.
Fiber Opt ic Cables Handle opt ical fibers wit h care. Keep t hem in a safe and secure locat ion
during inst allat ion.
Do not at t empt t o bend t hem beyond t heir minimum bending radius.
Prot ect / cover unconnect ed opt ical fiber connect ors wit h dust caps.
Grounding
Connect ions
Reliable grounding of t he TRuepoint

SPU must be maint ained.


Refer t o I nst ruct ions in t he SPU manual for grounding t he SPU.
Refer also t o I nst ruct ions in t he RFU manual for grounding of t he RFU, RFU
cable, light ning sure suppressor.
Light ning Surge
Suppressor
All TRuepoint

cables must be fit t ed wit h t he specified sure suppressor( s) .


Mains Power
Supply Rout ing
TRuepoint

DC power, I F, t ribut ary, auxiliary and NMS cables are not t o be


rout ed wit h any AC mains power lines. They are also t o be kept away from
any power lines which cross t hem.
I MN- 903003- E07 June 2008 1- 7
TRuepoi nt

5000 & 4040 Oper at or I nt er f ace


Maximum
Ambient
Temperat ure
The maximum ambient t emperat ure for bot h t he TRuepoint

SPU and RFU


is 55
o
C. To ensure correct operat ion and t o maximize long t erm component
reliabilit y, ambient t emperat ures must not be exceeded. Operat ional
specificat ion compliance is not guarant eed for higher ambient s.
Mechanical
Loading
When inst alling an indoor unit in a rack, ensure t he rack is securely anchored.
Ensure t hat t he addit ional loading of a TRuepoint

SPU( s) will not cause any


reduct ion in t he mechanical st abilit y of t he rack.
Power Supply
Connect ion
The TRuepoint

radios modem supplies DC power t o all ot her modules. DC


input volt age ranges from 20 V t o 60 V wit h 8 A maximum current .
Power Supply
Disconnect
An appropriat e power supply disconnect device should be provided as part of
t he building inst allat ion.
SPU St acking
Considerat ions
I f t he TRuepoint

SPU is inst alled in a closed or mult i- unit rack assembly,


t he operat ing ambient t emperat ure of t he rack environment may be great er
t han room ambient . The maximum ambient t emperat ure of 55 C applies t o
t he immediat e operat ing environment of t he TRuepoint

SPU, which, if
inst alled in a rack, is t he ambient wit hin t he rack. Refer t o
Rest rict ed Access A locat ion qualified in accordance wit h I EC St andard 60950- 1 as providing an
access t hat can only be gained by Skilled Persons or users who have been
inst ruct ed about t he reasons for t he rest rict ion applied t o t he locat ion and
about any precaut ions t o be t aken. Such access must be achieved t hrough
t he use of a t ool, lock and key, or ot her means of securit y, and be cont rolled
by t he aut horit y responsible for t he locat ion, ( dedicat ed equipment rooms,
closet s, cabinet s, or t he like) . Access t o t he t ower and RFU/ ant enna locat ion
must also be rest rict ed.
Topi c I nf or mat i on
1- 8 Har r i s St r at ex Net w or k s
Chapt er 1. I nt r oduct i on
I MN- 903003- E07 June 2008 2- 1
Chapt er 2. Tool s & Feat ur es
The following is an overview of some tools and features that are used in the
TRuepoint system and software.
Sy st em Conf i gur at i on/ Management
Web- CI T
The TRuepoint Web- CI T provides for configuration, control, and administration of
the radio as well as a display for alarms via an embedded web interface. The Web- CI T
is available with a direct connection or remotely through the customers TCP/ IP
network, and displays the current status of both the local and remote units.
The Web-CIT has five main sections:
Fault Management
Configuration
Administration
Performance
Security
Har r i s St r at ex Net w or k s Key pad or VT- 100 Ter mi nal
The Harris Stratex Networks Keypad/ Hand Held Terminal (HHT) provides for the
configuration of the radio as well as a display for alarms. The same functionality is
available using VT-100 emulation on a standard PC terminal.
You can use the Keypad or a VT-100 terminal to:
Configure and control the system
Review system status
Review system alarms
Implement password control
E- Key pad
E-Keypad is an application that can be used alone or integrated within the FarScan
software running on a PC. This application displays a pop-up window that shows the
HHT, allowing a user from a given site to control and monitor a remote TRuepoint


5000 radio, or any other radio that supports the ESCAN protocol on a Harris Stratex
Networks Microwave network.
2- 2 Har r i s St r at ex Net w or k s
Chapt er 2. Tool s & Feat ur es
Net com
The Netcom protocol carries information inside a Harris Stratex Networks equipment
network. Its minimum capacity (or bandwidth) allocated in the overhead of the radio
is 6 x 64 kbit/ s = 384 kbit/ s (depending on the capacity of the radio) up to 8 x 64 kbit/
s + 20 kbit/ s = 532 kbit/ s for higher bit rates (3DS3).
This protocol encapsulates all the functions such as SCAN (System Control and Alarm
Network), Network Management, O/ W, and Data Channel. The payload or bandwidth
is dynamically allocated to any of these services; this means that if the O/ W and 19.2
kbit/ s data channels are not used this capacity is then allocated to Netcom to assign to
the remaining services such as NMS or SCAN. This will increase the speed of the
Network Management System and SCAN.
Netcom is carried in the auxiliary channel of the RF link (radio overhead, except in the
case of SONET and SDH). On that link, it is encapsulated in HDLC-like frames.
The physical interface of Netcom is available on the two Ethernet (repeater) 10/ 100
Base-T ports to connect to other Harris Stratex Networks equipment. The two
connectors allow for daisy chain and NMS connections.
Netcom is available over HDLC links (HDLC Port) as well to connect to MicroStar


equipment and supports the following applications:
Local and remote login
SCAN
IP and ARP
Data Channel
Service channel digital bridge
Object exchange
Orderwire signalling
Network topology
Net Boss XE
NetBoss XE provides a cost effective, robust solution for managing network elements
such as the Harris Stratex Networks TRuepoint

radios.
NetBoss XE features include:
Comprehensive graphical microwave network map view, easily customized with your
choice of background map
Detailed, realistic radio graphical view with visual indicators updated in real time
Easily accessible configuration of all radio parameters
Point-and-click drill-down, from network to NE to plug-ins
Alarm, event and performance status displayed and updated in real time
Support for CORBA, XML over HTTP or SNMP-based open interfaces to other
management systems
Multi-user, multi-tasking, backed by user security administration application
Create alarms from SNMP enterprise traps
Ability to easily define, modify and retrieve threshold values
I MN- 903003- E07 June 2008 2- 3
TRuepoi nt

5000 & 4040 Oper at or I nt er f ace


Multi-platform Solaris 10 or Windows

2003 server
All data stored in Oracle-based repository
Consistency and uniformity of J ava Telecom Graphic Object (J TGO) based graphical
user interfaces (GUIs)
Easily administrated access to applications on a per user basis
Pr oVi si on

ProVision

is a network element management system with a variety of user-friendly


interfaces that provide various levels of interaction, customizable screens and report
formats.
ProVision

features include:
Up to ten simultaneous clients
Hierarchical or flat views with maps and backgrounds, icon status
Customized event browser fault manager
Automated event notification
Network Health Reports on basic RF performance against user-link standards
Cross-Platform Compatibility: Windows and Solaris
Performance and Security Management
Far Scan
FarScan is a user-friendly Windows

based SCAN/ SNMP proxy which monitors and


controls Harris Stratex Networks microwave radio alarms directly via a standard serial
communications port using Harris Stratex Networks' proprietary SCAN (System
Control and Alarm Network) protocol or SNMP protocol.
SNMP protocol allows remote connectivity through use of IP Networking to an SNMP
based network management system. The SNMP module is optionally available and can
be co-hosted on the same computer as FarScan.
FarScan performs the following primary functions:
Manual commands
Polling (AutoPoll and SelectPoll)
Reporting
FarScan networking
Paging
Paper l ess Char t Recor der ( PCR)
Paperless Chart Recorder (PCR) is a software-based diagnostic tool that uses SNMP or
SCAN connections to access the operational data that is stored on the radio. The
information is then presented in an easy to use graphical interface.
The performance data PCR collects includes the following:
Continuous main/ diversity RSL (received signal level)
All main/ diversity receiver alarms
2- 4 Har r i s St r at ex Net w or k s
Chapt er 2. Tool s & Feat ur es
Signal degradation and eye quality indications
Online transmitter and receiver switching for 1+1 or 1:N protected systems
Tributary interface alarms such as ES (errored seconds),
SES (severely errored seconds) and LOF (loss of frame)
Equipment module alarms
Date and time
PCR is an optional package. Please contact your local Harris Stratex Networks Sales
representative to purchase the PCR software and training package. More information
about PCR can be found in the PCR I n s t r u ct i on manual, IMN-112951-Exx.
Event Log Vi ew er
The Event Log Viewer is part of the Web-CIT and provides the ability to monitor and
log events for further analysis. It captures key events that occur on the radio such as
alarms, configuration changes, attempted logins, etc. Events can then be filtered and/
or sorted for further diagnosis. See Chapt er 5 for more information.
Sof t w ar e Dow nl oad/ Upgr ade
Sof t w ar e Key s
In software system 6.x and above, two types of software keys are utilized: Software
Feature Keys and Software Capacity Keys.
Software Feature Keys include optional features to the system such as Event Logger
and Strong Security that customers may choose to include in their system.
Software Capacity Keys allow customers to upgrade the capacity of their system quickly
and easily by purchasing a software key and performing the upgrade remotely.
Mi cr ow av e Sof t w ar e Upgr ade Ut i l i t y
The Microwave Software Upgrade Utility (MSUU) allows customers to upgrade the
radio with a software upgrade pack. The MSUU provides a user-friendly interface for
connecting to the radio and initiating the upgrade process. It provides the ability to do
a direct upgrade to an individual radio, a direct flash upgrade through a MMC card
reader, or an upgrade utilizing the radios ESCAN interface.
The MSUU is designed to work with a PC running Microsoft Windows

2000, Service
Pack 4 or later.
Conf i gur at i on Tr ansf er Ut i l i t y
The Configuration Transfer Utility (CTU) allows customers to upgrade from a Version
1 Controller running software 4.x or lower to a Version 2 Controller running software
6.x or higher without losing their configuration data.
I MN- 903003- E07 June 2008 3- 1
Chapt er 3. Conf i gur i ng and
Oper at i ng t he Radi o
Cont r ol and Moni t or i ng
Figure 3- 1 shows the connections that can be made to control and monitor the
equipment.
The Web- CI T is the preferred method and uses a 10/ 100 Base-T ethernet connection;
there are two provided allowing for a repeater configuration. For instructions on how
to use the Web- CI T please turn to page 3- 7.
The Harris Stratex Networks Keypad/ Hand-Held Terminal or another VT-100
compatible terminal connects to the radio via the RS-232 Port 2. If you are using
FarScan to monitor legacy equipment, it connects through Port 1.
Figure 3-1. Truepoint monit oring connect ions
Sof t w ar e Compat i bi l i t y & Feat ur es
I n order t o run Soft ware Version 6.x. x. or higher you must have t he
Version 2 Cont roller Card ( 101- 903460- 501) . Please see t he SPU
I nst al l at i on Manual for more informat ion about t he Cont roller cards.
The following table lists the features that are available with the Controller models.
Web- CI T
connect ion
HSN Keypad or
VT- 100 t erminal
Basic Relay Alarm
3- 2 Har r i s St r at ex Net w or k s
Chapt er 3. Conf i gur i ng and Oper at i ng t he Radi o
Table 3-1. V1 vs. V2 Cont roller
Software keys are available for both features and capacities. For more information on
how to purchase a software key, contact Harris Stratex Networks Customer Service. For
information on installing and/ or upgrading your software key, go to Chapt er 4.
To see what features and capacities you have available, go to CONFI GURATI ON >
I NVENTORY > SW KEY in the Web- CI T.
Usi ng t he hand- hel d/ VT- 100 t er mi nal
The hand-held terminal/ Harris Stratex Networks keypad or any other VT-100
compatible terminal interacts with the embedded control software in the radio and
connects to the radio through Port 2 on the Controller module. Once connected, a user
will see a number of menus and managed object screens that are linked together in a
tree. The operator uses key strokes to move from menu to menu and to change
parameters. To order a Harris Stratex Networks keypad, see the part list in the S PU
I n s t a lla t i on manual, IMN-903002-Exx.
Connect i ng t o t he Radi o: Hand- Hel d or PC/ VT- 100
Ter mi nal
Hand- Hel d Ter mi nal Uni t ( HHT)
Connect the HHT to Port 2 on the IDU as shown in Figure 3- 1.
As shown in Figure 3- 2, the HHT has an 11-key keypad, four function keys, and a
4-line by 20-column alphanumeric readout (display).
The numeric keys (keys 0 through 9) are used for keying in numeric values. They are
also used for the following functions:
The 2, 4, 6, and 8 numeric keys are also used as arrow keys and are used to scroll up
(8 key), down (2 key), page-up (4 key), and page-down (6 key) through the menus.
Page-up and page-down move the display four lines up and down respectively.
Feat ur e Ver si on 1 Ver si on 2
Soft ware Version 4. x or lower 6. x and higher
Securit y Basic Basic; St rong available w/
purchase of soft ware key
Web- CI T I ncluded I ncluded
a
a. These feat ures are available via a soft ware key and will be included unless ot herwise
not ed.
Time Synchronizat ion
( SNTP)
I ncluded in
4. x soft ware
I ncluded
a
Event Log Viewer Not available I ncluded
a
VT- 100 over Telnet I ncluded
a
I MN- 903003- E07 June 2008 3- 3
TRuepoi nt

5000 & 4040 Oper at or I nt er f ace


The 5 numeric key is used as a HOME key, which closes the existing menu and
returns to the MAIN menu.
To enter letters, hold down the appropriate numeric key (0-9) and wait for the letter
you want to appear. Only capital letters are supported.
The ENTER key is used to initiate the execution of a selected menu function or register
a numeric value.
The function keys (F1, F2, F3, and F4) are used to execute menu functions that appear
as soft keys on the last line in applicable menus. Function key F1 corresponds to the
first soft key selection, F2 to the second, F3 to the third, and F4 to the fourth. Refer
to Figure 3- 4 for the location of the soft keys in the display.
Figure 3-2. The Hand- held Terminal Unit
VT- 100 Ter mi nal or PC
Connect the VT-100 terminal or PC to Port 2 on the IDU as shown in Figure 3- 1. You
will need an RJ -45 to RS-232 cable or a RJ -45 cable with a RS-232 adapter. Port 2 is
pre-configured at 9600 baud.
All Windows PCs have HyperTerminal which will allow you to emulate a VT-100
terminal. To use HyperTerminal, go to Programs > Accessories > Communication >
HyperTerminal from the Windows Start menu.
If you are using Microsoft Telnet Client instead of Hyper Terminal, you will need to
make sure that the preferred terminal type is ANSI.
The VT-100 or PC communications port must be configured as follows:
VT- 100 PC
Mode ANSI ANSI
Local echo OFF OFF
Cont rol I NTERPRET N/ A
Host port RS232C ( modem port ) RS232C ( modem port )
Port speed 9600 baud 9600 baud
3- 4 Har r i s St r at ex Net w or k s
Chapt er 3. Conf i gur i ng and Oper at i ng t he Radi o
The layout of a typical PC keyboard is shown in Figure 3- 3. You will need to use the
numeric keys for entering numeric values and the arrow keys to scroll up and down.
The RETURN key is used to initiate the execution of a selected menu function or to
register a numeric value.
The period key (.) is used as the HOME key.
The F1, F2, F3, and F4 keys serve as the four function keys that represent the soft keys
in the display. The soft key EXIT will return the display back to the previous menu.
Figure 3-3. A t ypical PC keyboard
Conf i gur i ng and Oper at i ng t he Radi o: Hand- Hel d or
PC/ VT- 100 Ter mi nal
Movi ng f r om Menu t o Menu
Once a terminal is connected the operator simply uses certain keys to move from menu
to menu. The starting point is the main menu as seen in Figure 3- 4 when using a
VT-100 terminal or a PC emulation. If you are using the hand-held keypad, only three
lines will appear at a time so you will need to use the arrow keys to scroll down. To
access the sub-menus, use the arrow-key to scroll through the menu until the desired
sub-menu is aligned with the cursor. Then press the return or enter key to display the
selected menu. Repeat this procedure on the item that you wish to view or change. To
return to the previous menu press F4 (EXIT). To return to the MAIN menu press
HOME (.).
Dat a bit s 8 8
St op bit 1 1
Parit y NONE NONE
VT- 100 PC
I MN- 903003- E07 June 2008 3- 5
TRuepoi nt

5000 & 4040 Oper at or I nt er f ace


Figure 3-4. The Main Menu
For more information on menus, please refer to Chapt er 6 and Chapt er 7. The entire
menu tree is listed in Chapter 6; Chapter 7 contains explanations of many of the menu
items arranged in alphabetical order.
Pat h Not at i on
This manual uses a short-form notation convention to designate menu items. To
designate a particular item, the item name is given plus the names of all the menus
between the MAI N menu and the item. For example, ALARM > PATH > RSL A LOW
designates the RSL A LOW menu item in the ALARM branch.
Sel ect i ng menu opt i ons
Many of the menus provide a number of optional operations. For example the
CONTROL > LOCK > LOCK TX OUT item provides two options: SET and CLR.
In the CONTROL branch these options are shown on the display. Also shown on the
display is the standard EXI T option as a soft key position on the bottom line of the
screen. To select a soft key option, press the F key that corresponds to the option (see
Figure 3- 2 or Figure 3- 3).
In the CONFI GURATI ON branch, options appear in the NEW VAL field of a selection
screen (see Figure 3- 5) that appears when the corresponding parameter is selected
from the menu. The operator uses the PREV and NEXT keys to bring the required value
into the NEW VAL field, then presses EXEC to select it as the new configuration value.
Figure 3-5. Configurat ion Opt ion Select ion Screen
User Aut hor i zat i on
The TRuepoint radio has a user authorization feature that limits access to multiple
features including the control and configuration menus.
> NE ADDRESS
ALARM
STATUS
PERFORMANCE
CONTROL
CONFIGURATION
2
1. Menu item.
2. Cursor.
3. Soft key spaces (key
functions appear when
applicable). These soft
key spaces correspond to
function keys F1, F2, F3,
and F4 on the keyboard.
3
1
PROTECTI ON
ACTUAL VAL: MSHB
NEW VAL: UNPROT
PREV NEXT EXEC EXI T
3- 6 Har r i s St r at ex Net w or k s
Chapt er 3. Conf i gur i ng and Oper at i ng t he Radi o
In order to restrict access to the menus in the HHT, you will need to go to
CONFI GURATI ON > ENABLE LOGI N and turn it ON. You will then need to logout
of the system. Once ENABLE LOGI N is turned ON, when you go to use the HHT a new
screen (see Figure 3- 6) will appear asking for your user name and password.
When you receive your radio, t he default user name is admin and t he
default password is 12345 for soft ware version 4. 5 or lower or
12345678 for soft ware version 6. x and higher.
Figure 3-6. ENABLE LOGI N screen
In this screen, CLR and BS are used to edit the field, EXEC will show you a list of user
names that you can select instead of typing one in, and VIEW puts the keypad in
read-only mode.
If you want to limit access to the control and configuration menus for a particular user
account, go to the CONFI GURATI ON > SECURI TY > LOCAL USERS menu item,
create or select the appropriate user, and then select NO under CONTROL ACCESS
and CONFI G ACCESS.
If you forget or lose your password you can use the FORGOT PASSWORD? feature on
the main menu. In order to access the FORGOT PASSWORD? menu, when the screen
appears asking for your user name and password you will need to select VI EW in the
bottom right hand corner (F4). Selecting VI EW will allow you into the system as a
guest. Once you have logged in as a guest, FORGOT PASSWORD? will appear in the
menu after CONFI GURATI ON. Select it, and an access code will appear. You must then
call Customer Service with this access code. Customer Service will give you a 1 time use
only password that will allow you to login to the system and fix your password.
The NE addr ess
The network element (NE) address is u n i q u e to each radio in the network. The
embedded control software and FarScan network control software use this address
to select remote radios for control and monitoring operations. The embedded control
software uses the NE ADDRESS item in the main menu to enter the address of the
remote radio to be operated. The NE ADDRESS item in the configuration menu is used
to set the NE ADDRESS of the local radio.The selection screen for configuring the NE
address is similar to the one shown in Figure 3- 5, with the difference that it allows the
operator to enter an NE address value in the NEW VAL field before pressing EXEC.
SYSTEM LOGI N
USER:
PASS:
CLR BS EXEC VI EW
I MN- 903003- E07 June 2008 3- 7
TRuepoi nt

5000 & 4040 Oper at or I nt er f ace


Usi ng t he Web- CI T
The Web- CI T is an embedded Web based CIT providing the ability to configure,
control, and administer the system. This tool utilizes web technology to control and
monitor the radio system through a direct connection, or remotely through the
customers TCP/ IP network. Radio pairs, both local and remote, are visible to the
operator from the same screen.
On the TRuepoint SPU, either of the 10/ 100 Base-T ports on the Controller module
allows you to connect a PC to the radio in order to access the Web- CI T. The Web- CI T
will work with either Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0 and higher or Mozilla Firefox
1.5 and higher.
I f you use I nt ernet Explorer 7. 0 you might need t o change t he default
securit y set t ings. I n I E, go t o Tools > I nt ernet Opt ions and t hen select
t he Securit y t ab. Click on Cust om Level, and t hen scroll t o
Miscellaneous > Navigat e sub- frames across different domains and
Enable t his opt ion if not enabled already.
The Web-CIT is powered by the GoAhead Web Server.
Secur i t y Consi der at i ons
Depending on the security measures at a given site, a customer may need to adjust their
security permissions in order to use the Web- CI T. If this is the case, users should be
aware that configuring a web browser to run the Web- CI T could create a security
breach when accessing the Internet if the security settings are lowered. Users should
reset their security levels back to the higher levels before using the same computer to
access the Internet for usage other than the Web- CI T.
I n no ev ent shal l Har r i s St r at ex Net w or k s, i t s st af f and/ or
par t ner s be l i abl e t o t he user f or any speci al , consequent i al ,
i ndi r ect or si mi l ar damages, i ncl udi ng any l ost pr of i t s or l ost dat a
ar i si ng out of such a secur i t y br each. The user i s sol el y
r esponsi bl e f or t ak i ng al l pr ot ect i on measur es necessar y f or
achi evi ng a secur e connect i on bef or e, dur i ng, and af t er t he use of
t he Web- CI T sof t w ar e.
3- 8 Har r i s St r at ex Net w or k s
Chapt er 3. Conf i gur i ng and Oper at i ng t he Radi o
Connect i ng t o t he Radi o: TRuepoi nt Web- CI T
There are two ways to connect to the radio with the TRuepoint Web- CI T.
Op t ion 1:
1. Connect a PC to a 10/ 100 Base-T port on the IDU as shown in Figure 3- 1. You will
need a standard ethernet cable. Make sure that the computer you are using is in the
same subnet as the radio; if it is not, go to Start > Settings > Network and Dial-up
Connections on your PC. Then click on Local Area Connection and then the
Properties tab. Select Internet Protocol (TCP/ IP) and then the Properties tab.
Select Use the following address and enter an IP address that is in the same
subnet as the radio. For examples, see Step 7.
2. Go to your internet browser and type in the IP address that corresponds to the NE
address; the IP address is always 10.x.xx.1, where the first digit of the NE address
comprises the first x, and the second and third digits comprise the second and third
x. The default NE address of a new radio is 999 so the IP address will be 10.9.99.1.
3. You will be prompted to enter your user name and password. If this is the first time
you are connecting to the system, the default user name is a d m in and the default
password is 12345 if you have software version 4.5 or lower or 123456 78 if you
have software version 6.x or higher. If you have both a local and a remote site, you
will need to login to both sites.
4. Once you have entered your user name and password, Figure 3- 7 will appear.
Note that the local radio is on the left side of the main frame and the remote radio
is on the right side.
If the local and the remote system do not have the same software version, the
remote site will display a notification message. The functionality of the local
window in the Web- CI T will not be affected. If this occurs, open a separate
Web- CI T session to access the remote site.
5. Go to CONFI GURATI ON > SYSTEM and enter a new NE address. Make sure you
click the APPLY button. Once you have done this, you will need to reboot the
Controller.
6. The defaults for the TRuepoint ethernet interface are ENABLED, and AUTO mode.
Au t o mode automatically generates the Ethernet IP address and subnet mask for
each radio based on the NE address. In order to make sure that you will connect
correctly, you should go to Start > Settings > Network and Dial-up Connections on
your PC. Then click on Local Area Connection and then the Properties tab. Select
Internet Protocol (TCP/ IP) and then the Properties tab. Make sure that Obtain an
IP address automatically is selected.
If at a later date you change the ETHERNET MODE to Ma n u a l, you should follow
these same steps except make sure that Use the following IP address is selected.
7. See Net work Configurat ion on page 3- 41 for more information on the
ETHERNET MODE.
8. Once this is done and the system has rebooted, go to your internet browser and type
in the IP address that corresponds to the number you entered as the NE address.
Examples:
NE Address is 232, IP address is 10.2.32.1
NE Address is 1, IP address is 10.0.1.1
NE Address is 20, IP address is 10.0.20.1
NE address is 800, IP address is 10.8.0.1
I MN- 903003- E07 June 2008 3- 9
TRuepoi nt

5000 & 4040 Oper at or I nt er f ace


Op t ion 2:
1. Using the Harris Stratex Networks Keypad or another VT-100 compatible terminal,
enter the NE ADDRESS in the CONFI GURATI ON > NETWORK MANAGEMENT
menu. The NE ADDRESS must be a number from 001 to 999.
2. Connect a PC to a 10/ 100 Base-T port on the IDU as shown in Figure 3- 1. You will
need a standard ethernet cable.
3. The defaults for the TRuepoint ethernet interface are ENABLED, and AUTO mode.
Au t o mode automatically generates the Ethernet IP address and subnet mask for
each radio based on the NE address. The DHCP server should be enabled as well.
I f y ou use t he PC y ou ar e usi ng t o connect t o t he r adi o f or ot her
pur poses and t he r adi o i s DHCP enabl ed, y ou shoul d r el ease and
r enew y our I P connect i on bef or e ent er i ng t he I P addr ess of t he
Web- CI T. To do t hi s, go t o t he DOS pr ompt and t y pe i n i pconf i g/
r el ease and t hen i pconf i g/ r enew .
In order to make sure that you will connect correctly, you should go to Start >
Settings > Network and Dial-up Connections on your PC. Then click on Local Area
Connection and then the Properties tab. Select Internet Protocol (TCP/ IP) and
then the Properties tab. Make sure that Obtain an IP address automatically is
selected.
See Net work Configurat ion on page 3- 41 for more information on the
ETHERNET MODE.
4. Once this is done, go to your internet browser and type in the IP address that
corresponds to the number you entered as the NE address. Examples:
NE Address is 232, IP address is 10.2.32.1
NE Address is 1, IP address is 10.0.1.1
NE Address is 20, IP address is 10.0.20.1
NE address is 800, IP address is 10.8.0.1
5. You will be prompted to enter your user name and password. If this is the first time
you are connecting to the system, the default user name is a d m in and the default
password is 1234 5/ 1234 5678 depending on your software version. If you have
both a local and a remote site, you will need to login to both sites.
If the local and the remote system do not have the same software version, the
remote site will display a notification message. The functionality of the local
window in the Web- CI T will not be affected. If this occurs, open a separate
Web- CI T session to access the remote site.
6. Once you have entered your user name and password, Figure 3- 7 will appear.
Note that the local radio is on the left side of the main frame and the remote radio
is on the right side.
3- 10 Har r i s St r at ex Net w or k s
Chapt er 3. Conf i gur i ng and Oper at i ng t he Radi o
Figure 3-7. TRuepoint CI T main page
Not es
I t is our recommendat ion t hat you keep a Web- CI T session open for no
longer t hen 12 hours. I f you have a session open for t hat long, please
logout , close your web browser, re- open t he browser, and login again.
I f you are using t he Web- CI T while connect ed t o a V1 Cont roller on one
side of t he hop, and t he remot e t erminal has a V2 Cont roller, t he remot e
side of t he screen may not show properly if t he screen cont ains
informat ion t hat is not support ed by t he V1 Cont roller. I f you need t o see
t his informat ion it is recommended t hat you connect t o t he remot e sit e
as if you were local.
You must close t he Web- CI T session you are in if you plan t o swap
cont rollers. Once you have swapped out t he cont roller, you can re- open
t he Web- CI T.
I MN- 903003- E07 June 2008 3- 11
TRuepoi nt

5000 & 4040 Oper at or I nt er f ace


Conf i gur i ng and Oper at i ng t he Radi o: TRuepoi nt
Web- CI T
Ex pandi ng Menus
Once the Web- CI T is connected the operator simply uses the navigator bar on the far
left hand side to move from menu to menu. To expand a menu, click on the appropriate
menu item in the black bar and the rest of that menu will appear as shown in Figure
3- 8. In this example, the Configuration menu has been expanded, while the Fault
Management, Administration, Performance, and Security menus have not.
Sel ect i ng menu opt i ons
Once you have expanded a menu, you can move from screen to screen simply by
clicking on the appropriate option. Figure 3- 8 and Figure 3- 9 show the screen that
appears when you click on CONFI GURATI ON > SYSTEM.
Figure 3-8. Syst em Configurat ion Menu Example 1
3- 12 Har r i s St r at ex Net w or k s
Chapt er 3. Conf i gur i ng and Oper at i ng t he Radi o
Figure 3-9. Syst em Configurat ion Menu Example 2
Many of the menus provide a number of optional operations. For example the
CONFI GURATI ON > SYSTEM screen provides multiple drop down menus as seen in
Figures 3- 8 and 3- 9.
If you make a change, you must click the APPLY button at the bottom of each frame for
that change to take effect.
Ot her Feat ur es
The TRuepoint Web- CI T offers many other features to assist you in operation of the
system.
1. At the top of the window is a set of commands (Figure 3- 10) that do not change
as you navigate from screen to screen.
Home: At any time you can click on Home to return to the main screen.
Help: A new window will pop up containing the HELP database.
Log off: When you are finished, click on log off to be logged out of the system.
Refresh: Reloads the window.
Figure 3-10. Web- CI T t op menu
2. A graphical representation of the LEDs that are on the physical units appears at the
top of the main frame for both the Local and Remote site. Note that if the computer
icon below Local or Remote is flashing blue, the connection is up (see Figure
3- 11). If the computer icon is red, the connection has been lost. You can mouse
over the icon as well to get a message telling you whether you are connected or not.
I MN- 903003- E07 June 2008 3- 13
TRuepoi nt

5000 & 4040 Oper at or I nt er f ace


Figure 3-11. Web- CI T LEDs
3. On the main page, when you first log in to the system, a graphical representation of
the hardware for both the local and remote site appears. See Figure 3- 12 for
examples of the graphics.
Figure 3-12. Web- CI T hardware graphics
4. When you select an item from the menu bar such as CONFI GURATI ON >
SYSTEM as seen in Figure 3- 8, a HELP button appears at the bottom of the page.
If you want help for this particular screen, clicking on the HELP button will take you
directly to that information in the HELP database.
5. To change, the color scheme, go to ADMI NI STRATI ON > COLOR SCHEME. The
choices are gray, red, and green; gray is the default. When you change the color on
the local side, it changes the color on the local window and the navigation bars.
When you change the color on the remote side, it changes the remote window.
Conf i gur at i on Det ai l s
Once you have connected to the radio you will need to configure the system. The
following instructions are for using the Web- CI T to configure the system; the menu
path in the HHT will be listed at the end of each section.
If at any point you lose the connection to the remote site you will need to refresh the
window.
NE Addr ess
If you have not entered a unique IP address for the radio, do so at this time. See
Connect ing t o t he Radio: TRuepoint Web- CI T. For more information on the NE
Address, refer to Net work Configurat ion on page 3- 41.
TR4040 MHSB prot ect ed syst em wit h Mixed Mode MUX
TR5000 unprot ect ed syst em wit h Mixed Mode MUX
3- 14 Har r i s St r at ex Net w or k s
Chapt er 3. Conf i gur i ng and Oper at i ng t he Radi o
Tx & RX Fr equenci es
Go to CONFI GURATI ON > RADI O > FREQUENCY and set your Tx and Rx
frequencies. If you have a 4040 system, the Rx frequency will be calculated based on
the Tx frequency.
The default frequency for both Tx and Rx is 0 kHz so it is important that you enter a
correct frequency in the appropriate box. Entries should be made in kHz.
The following frequencies are available for the existing RFU bands:
Table 3-2. TRuepoint

4040 Frequency Ranges


Table 3-3. TRuepoint

5000 Frequency Ranges


HHT: CONFI GURATI ON > SYSTEM > RFU > TX A/ B FREQ, RX A/ B FREQ
RFU Band ( GHz) Fr equency Range ( GHz)
7 7.10 - 7.90
8 7.73 - 8.5
13 12. 75 - 13. 25
15 14. 40 - 15. 35
18 17. 70 - 19. 70
23 22. 00 - 23. 62
26 24. 25 - 26. 45
32 31. 82 - 33. 83
38 37. 00 - 40. 10
RFU Band ( GHz) Fr equency Range ( k Hz)
6L 5. 915 - 6. 425
6U 6. 425 - 7. 125
7 7. 100 - 7. 900
8 7. 725 - 8. 500
10/ 11 10. 500 - 11. 710
13 12. 700 - 13. 243
15 14. 500 - 15. 350
18 17. 700 - 19. 705
23 21. 200 - 23. 600
38 37. 000 - 40. 000
I MN- 903003- E07 June 2008 3- 15
TRuepoi nt

5000 & 4040 Oper at or I nt er f ace


Capaci t y
Go to CONFI GURATI ON > SYSTEM.
For every system, the software will detect from the MUX the maximum capacity of the
system. This number is displayed as a non-editable entry in CONFI GURATI ON >
SYSTEM as System Capability.
If you have a DS1 or E1 system, however, you can reduce the number of tributaries that
will be used by the system. This is available in the USED CAPACI TY drop-down menu.
You can see an example of this in Figure 3- 8.
If you set the USED CAPACI TY to a lower number than the SYSTEM CAPABI LI TY,
then the actual capacity of the system will be equal to the lower number. For example,
if you have a MUX with a hardware key of 16DS1, but you only want to use 8 tributaries
at this time, then you would set your USED CAPACI TY at 8 DS1. Your SYSTEM
CAPABI LI TY will still appear as 16DS1.
If you are connected to a remote site and you want to change the USED CAPACI TY you
should always change the remote end first.
HHT: CONFI GURATI ON > SYSTEM > SPU > USED CAPACI TY for setting the
Used Capacity, STATUS > SYSTEM > CAPABI LI TY for viewing the System
Capability.
Capaci t y Key s
Capacities can be limited by a hardware key (V1 Controller and 2-16 E1 or 4-16 DS1
MUX) or by a software key (V2 Controller and 2-16 E1, 4-16 DS1, NxE1/
DS1+2x10-100BASE-T). If you have a system with both types of keys, the system will
detect and enable the highest value for each MUX.
To find out the value of your hardware key, go to CONFI GURATI ON > I NVENTORY
> CARD.
To find out the value of your software key, go to CONFI GURATI ON > I NVENTORY
> SW KEY. To purchase a software capacity key, please contact Harris Stratex
Networks Customer Service.
32E1 Capaci t y
If order to use 32E1, you must have 2 NxE1+2x10-100BASE-T MUXes (part no.
102-902582-511) and have purchased a software key for Split Dual Mux 32E1. You
must also have the SPU shelf with part no. 202-902595-511 backplane.
The 32E1 configurat ion will not work unless you have t he proper
backplane. I f you do not have t he correct backplane, t here will be a loss
of synchronizat ion on one of t he MUXes.
Please note that if you have purchased a software key for a capacity other than 32E1,
that software key will co-exist with the 32E1 software key. They will both show as
Available on the CONFI GURATI ON > I NVENTORY > SW KEY page if you have
both.
3- 16 Har r i s St r at ex Net w or k s
Chapt er 3. Conf i gur i ng and Oper at i ng t he Radi o
To enable 32 E1, go to CONFI GURATI ON > SYSTEM > MUX TRAFFI C MODE.
Select SPLI T DUAL MUX from the drop-down menu. Once you have selected this, mix
32E1 in the USED CAPACI TY menu should appear as shown in Figure 3- 9.
When you change t he t r af f i c mode f r om Si ngl e Mux t o Spl i t Dual
Mux or v i ce v er sa, y ou shoul d al w ay s r eboot t he Cont r ol l er
sof t w ar e.
Pr ot ect i on
Stay on the CONFI GURATI ON > SYSTEM page. The following protection schemes
are available under the PROTECTI ON drop-down menu.
If your system protection is MHSB, FD, SD, or FD/ SD, you also have the option of
protecting the MUX. Select Protected from the MUX PROTECTI ON drop-down menu.
You can see an example of this in Figure 3- 9, which shows MHSB protection.
HHT: SYSTEM > SPU > PROTECTI ON, SYSTEM > SPU > MUX PROTECTI ON.
I f you select Frequency Diversit y or Hybrid Diversit y, it is recommended
t hat you select Manual or DTPC for your TPC Mode. I n a FD or HD
configurat ion wit h ATPC mode, when t here is select ive fading of t he
current online channel, boost ing of t he out put power of bot h t ransmit t ers
will increase t he out put power of anot her channel. A high level of out put
power of t his second channel might cause unneeded int erference wit h
ot her syst ems and will consume High Out put Power allowance t ime if
such a rest rict ion is enforced.
Sel ect i on Ex pl anat i on
UNPROTECTED Nonprot ect ed radio
UNPROTECTED- 2
a
a. Not available wit h TR4040.
2+ 0 nonprot ect ed radios
MHSB Monit ored Hot St andby
FD Frequency Diversit y
SD Space Diversit y
FD/ SD
a
Hybrid Diversit y
I MN- 903003- E07 June 2008 3- 17
TRuepoi nt

5000 & 4040 Oper at or I nt er f ace


Channel Bandw i dt h
Stay on the CONFI GURATI ON > SYSTEM page. Under the BANDWI DTH
drop-down menu there are corresponding bandwidths that may be selected for each
capacity. Table 3- 4 and Table 3- 5 display these options. When you select the
appropriate bandwidth, the corresponding MODULATI ON will automatically appear.
Table 3-4. Bandwidt h- Capacit y Paris, TR4040
Capaci t y Bandw i dt h
( MHz)
Modul at i on Syst em Fr equency Band
( GHz)
2E1 or
mix2E1
3. 5 QPSK 7, 8, 13, 15, 18, 23, 26
4E1 or mix
4E1
7. 0 QPSK 7, 8, 13, 15, 18, 23, 26, 38
8E1 or
mix8E1
14. 0 QPSK 7, 8, 13, 15, 23, 26, 38
13. 75 QPSK 18
7. 0 16QAM 7, 8, 13, 15, 18, 23, 26, 38
16E1 or
mix16E1
28. 0 QPSK 7, 8, 13, 15, 23, 26, 38
27. 5 QPSK 18
14. 0 16QAM 7, 8, 13, 15, 23, 26, 38
13. 75 16QAM 18
OC3/ STS3/
100DS1
30. 0 128 QAM 26 High Capacit y Narrow Band
only
3- 18 Har r i s St r at ex Net w or k s
Chapt er 3. Conf i gur i ng and Oper at i ng t he Radi o
Table 3-5. Bandwidt h- Capacit y Paris, TR5000
Capaci t y
a
Bandw i dt h
( MHz)
Modul at i on Sy st em Fr equency Band ( GHz)
4DS1 or
mix4DS1
5. 0 QPSK 11, 15, 18, 23, 38
2. 5 16QAM 6L, 6U, 7, 8, 11, 15, 18, 23, 38
8DS1 or mix8
DS1
10. 0 QPSK 15, 18, 23, 38
5. 0 16QAM 7, 15, 18, 23, 38
3. 75 32QAM 6L, 6U, 7, 8, 11, 15
12DS1 or
mix12DS1
5. 0 32QAM 6L, 6U, 7, 8, 11, 15, 18, 23, 38
16DS1 or
mix16DS1
20. 0 QPSK 15, 18, 23, 38
10. 0 16QAM 11, 15, 18, 23, 38
5. 0 128QAM 6L, 6U, 7, 8, 11
2E1 or
mix2E1
3. 5 QPSK 6L, 6U, 7, 8, 10, 11, 13, 15, 18, 23, 26, 38
4E1 or
mix4E1
7. 0 QPSK 6L, 6U, 7, 8, 10, 11, 13, 15, 18, 23, 26, 38
3. 5 16QAM 6L, 6U, 7, 8, 10, 11, 13, 15, 18, 23, 26, 38
8E1 or
mix8E1
14. 0 QPSK 6L, 6U, 7, 8, 10, 11, 13, 15, 23, 26, 38
13.75 QPSK 18
7. 0 16QAM 6L, 6U, 7, 8, 10, 11, 13, 15, 18, 23, 26, 38
16E1 or
mix16E1
28. 0 QPSK 6L, 6U, 7, 8, 10, 11, 13, 15, 23, 26, 38
27. 5 QPSK 18
27. 0 QPSK 7, 15
29. 65 QPSK 6L, 6U, 8
14. 0 16QAM 6L, 6U, 7, 8, 10, 11, 13, 15, 23, 26, 38
13. 75 16QAM 18
21E1 ( Sub
155 Mb)
56. 0 QPSK 23, 26, 38
40.0 QPSK 11, 26
30.0 32QAM 6U
29.65 32QAM 6L, 8
28. 0 32QAM 6L, 7, 8, 10, 11, 13, 15, 23, 26, 38
27.5 32QAM 18
27.0 32QAM 7, 15
14. 0 32QAM 7, 8, 11, 13, 15, 23, 26, 38
13. 75 32QAM 18
I MN- 903003- E07 June 2008 3- 19
TRuepoi nt

5000 & 4040 Oper at or I nt er f ace


OC- 3/ STS- 3 50.0 32QAM 23, 38
40. 0 64QAM 11, 13, 18, 23
29. 65 128QAM 6L
30. 0 128QAM 6L, 6U, 7, 8, 11, 13, 18, 23
STM- 1 56.0 32QAM 23, 26, 38
55.0 32QAM 18
50.0 32QAM 23
40. 0 64QAM 6L, 6U, 11, 26
27.5 128QAM 18
27. 0 128QAM 7, 15
28. 0 128QAM 6L, 7, 8, 10, 11, 13, 15, 23, 26, 38
29.65 128QAM 6L, 8
30.0 128QAM 6U
3DS3+ 3DS1 50.0 16QAM 23, 38
40. 0 32QAM 11, 15, 18, 23
29. 65 128QAM 6L
30. 0 128QAM 6L, 6U, 7, 8, 11, 15, 18
DS3 or
100BT or 28
DS1
15. 0 16QAM 15, 23, 38
10. 0 64QAM 6L, 6U, 7, 8, 11, 13, 15, 18, 23
DS3+ DS1 or
100BT+ DS1
or 28DS1
+ DS1
30. 0 QPSK 6L, 11, 18, 38
40. 0 QPSK 11, 15, 18, 23
15. 0 16QAM 15, 23, 38
20. 0 16QAM 6L, 6U, 13, 15, 18, 23, 38
10. 0 64QAM 6L, 6U, 7, 8, 11, 13, 15, 18, 23
E3+ E1 or
100BT+ E1
27. 0 QPSK 7, 15
27. 5 QPSK 18
28. 0 QPSK 6L, 6U, 7, 8, 10, 11, 13, 15, 23, 26, 38
29. 65 QPSK 6L, 6U, 8
14. 0 16QAM 6U, 7, 8, 10, 11, 13, 15, 23, 26, 38
13. 75 16QAM 18
Capaci t y
a
Bandw i dt h
( MHz)
Modul at i on Sy st em Fr equency Band ( GHz)
3- 20 Har r i s St r at ex Net w or k s
Chapt er 3. Conf i gur i ng and Oper at i ng t he Radi o
Mix29DS1 30.0 QPSK 6L, 11, 18, 38
40. 0 QPSK 11, 15, 18, 23
15. 0 16QAM 15, 23, 38
20. 0 16QAM 6L, 13, 15, 18, 23, 38
10. 0 64QAM 6L, 6U, 7, 8, 11, 13, 15, 18, 23
Mix58DS1 30. 0 16QAM 6L, 11, 18, 38
40. 0 16QAM 11, 15, 18, 23
20. 0 64QAM 6L, 6U, 7, 13, 15, 18, 23, 38
Mix87DS1 50.0 16QAM 23, 38
40. 0 32QAM 11, 15, 18, 23
29. 65 64QAM 6L
30. 0 64QAM 6L, 6U, 7, 8, 11, 15, 18, 38
Mix100 DS1 50.0 32QAM 23, 38
40. 0 64QAM 11, 15, 18, 23
30. 0 128QAM 6L, 6U, 7, 8, 11, 15, 18, 23
29. 65 128QAM 6L
Mix100BT+ 4
DS1
40. 0 16QAM 11, 15, 18, 23
20. 0 128QAM 6L, 6U, 7, 15, 18, 23
Mix35E1 29.65 16QAM 6L, 8
28. 0 16QAM 6L, 7, 8, 10, 11, 13, 15, 23, 26, 38
27.5 16QAM 18
27.0 16QAM 7, 15
14. 0 128QAM 7, 8, 10, 11, 13, 15, 23, 26, 38
13. 75 128QAM 18
Mix50E1 29.65 32QAM 6L, 8
28. 0 32QAM 6L, 7, 8, 10, 11, 13, 15, 23, 26, 38
27.5 32QAM 18
27.0 32QAM 7, 15
Capaci t y
a
Bandw i dt h
( MHz)
Modul at i on Sy st em Fr equency Band ( GHz)
I MN- 903003- E07 June 2008 3- 21
TRuepoi nt

5000 & 4040 Oper at or I nt er f ace


HHT: CONFI GURATI ON > SYSTEM > SPU > CHANNEL BW.
Tr i but ar i es/ Way si de
Depending on your system you will need to go to CONFI GURATI ON > MUX
I NTERFACES > TRI BUTARY or CONFI GURATI ON > MUX I NTERFACES >
WAYSI DE.
Mix75E1 56.0 32QAM 23, 26, 38
55.0 32QAM 18
50.0 32 QAM 23
40. 0 64QAM 6L, 6U, 11, 26
30.0 128QAM 6U
29.65 128QAM 6L, 8
28. 0 128QAM 6L, 7, 8, 10, 11, 13, 15, 23, 26, 38
27.5 128QAM 18
27. 0 128QAM 7, 15
Mix100BT+ 4
E1
29.65 32QAM 6L, 8
28. 0 32QAM 6L, 7, 8, 10, 11, 13, 15, 23, 26, 38
27.5 32QAM 18
27.0 32QAM 7, 15
32E1 29. 65 16QAM 6L, 8
28. 0 16QAM 6L, 7, 8, 10, 11, 13, 15, 23, 26, 38
27.5 16QAM 18
27.0 16QAM 7, 15
a. A Mix capacit y applies t o Mux cards t hat allow a mix of DS1/ E1 & Et hernet t raffic for a t ot al of over t he air
capacit y equivalent t o t he number of DS1s/ E1s list ed.
Capaci t y
a
Bandw i dt h
( MHz)
Modul at i on Sy st em Fr equency Band ( GHz)
3- 22 Har r i s St r at ex Net w or k s
Chapt er 3. Conf i gur i ng and Oper at i ng t he Radi o
Table 3-6. Tribut ar y/ Wayside Opt ions
HHT: CONFI GURATI ON > TRI BUTARI ES.
Figure 3-13. Tribut ary Example 1: 28DS1, 2+ 0 pr ot ect ion
Opt i on Tr i but ar y Way si de
I NDEX List s t he Tribut ary number. N/ A
STATUS Ensure t hat t he box is checked ( i.e.
ENABLE) for each t ribut ary t hat you
want t o carry t raffic.
Ensure t hat t he box is checked
( i. e. ENABLE) for each wayside
channel t hat you want t o carry
t raffic.
STATE ( MODE) N/ A Select DS1, E1, or DI SABLE.
CODE Applicable t o DS1 rat es only. Select
t he appropriat e line code for each
t ribut ary used: AMI or B8ZS. The
code should be t he same for bot h
sides of a hop.
N/ A if t he Wayside Mode is E1.
Select t he appropriat e line code
for t he wayside channel: AMI or
B8ZS.
EQUALI ZER Applicable t o DS1 or DS3 rat es only. Select t he appropriat e range in
feet : 0- 133, 133- 266, 266- 399, 399- 533, 533- 655
FRAMI NG Applicable t o 28DS1 or DS3 rat es.
Select t he appropriat e framing
format : m1- 3 asynchronous or
C- bit parit y. I f DS3, t he format
should be t he same for bot h sides of
a hop.
N/ A
TERMI NATI ON N/ A Applicable t o E1 rat e only. Select
E1 for unbalanced ( 75 ohms) ;
E1bal for balanced ( 120 ohms) .
I MN- 903003- E07 June 2008 3- 23
TRuepoi nt

5000 & 4040 Oper at or I nt er f ace


Figure 3-14. Tribut ary Example 2: 4DS1
Tr i but ar i es w i t h a 21E1 MUX
If you have a 21E1 MUX, your options are slightly different as seen in Figure 3- 15. The
options are described in Table 3- 7.
Figure 3-15. Tribut ary Example 3: 21E1 MUX
3- 24 Har r i s St r at ex Net w or k s
Chapt er 3. Conf i gur i ng and Oper at i ng t he Radi o
Table 3-7. 21E1 Tr ibut ary Opt ions
Tr i but ar i es w i t h a Nx E1/ Nx DS1+ 2x 10- 100BASE- T MUX
When you have a NxE1+2x10-100BASE-T or NxDS1+2x10-100BASE-T MUX, the
tributary page in the Web- CI T has three tabs: Tributaries, Ethernet Ports, and QoS
Map. There are many different ways you can distribute the traffic between the
Tributaries and the two Ethernet Ports. The following steps are designed to walk you
through setting up this type of MUX. For more information and illustrations, refer to
Appendix A.
1. Go to CONFI GURATI ON > SYSTEM. Select the capacity you want from the
USED CAPACI TY drop-down menu. Please note that if you select a capacity higher
than 16 DS1/ E1, such as mix58DS1, you will only have 16 tributaries and the rest of
the capacity will be allocated to the Ethernet Ports.
2. Go to CONFI GURATI ON > MUX I NTERFACES > TRI BUTARI ES. The options
on the Tributary tab remain the same as tributaries for other MUX options; see
Table 3- 6. If you have selected a USED CAPACI TY that is less than 16DS1/ E1 then
you will only see that number of tributaries. Otherwise you will see 16 as long as
your software key is not limited to a lower capacity. In the example in Figure 3- 16,
you can see the 16 tributaries listed, with 12 being enabled and 4 disabled. The
capacity of the 4 disabled tributaries is then available for ethernet traffic.
Opt i on Act i on
TI MI NG REFERENCE ( 1- 3) Allows you t o priorit ize t he t iming reference of t he MUX.
EXTERNAL CLOCK S1
BYTE
Allows you t o specify a synchronizat ion qualit y level for t he t iming
reference of t he ext ernal clock input 1.
PDH CLOCK S1 BYTE Allows you t o specify a synchronizat ion qualit y level for t he t iming
reference derived from t he PDH ( E1) incoming signal.
I NDEX List s t he Tribut ary number.
STATUS Ensure t hat t he box is checked ( i. e. ENABLE) for each t ribut ary t hat
you want t o carry t raffic.
I MN- 903003- E07 June 2008 3- 25
TRuepoi nt

5000 & 4040 Oper at or I nt er f ace


Figure 3-16. Tribut ary Ex. 4: NxDS1+ 2x10- 100BASE-T MUX
Figure 3-17. Tribut ary Ex. 5: NxE1+ 2x10- 100BASE-T, Split Dual MUX
3- 26 Har r i s St r at ex Net w or k s
Chapt er 3. Conf i gur i ng and Oper at i ng t he Radi o
3. Click on the Ethernet Port tab. Figure 3- 18 will appear. For definitions of each
line, see Table A- 7.
Figure 3-18. Et hernet Port s Tab
4. Depending on how many tributaries you have enabled, the remaining capacity will
appear in FI XED CAPACI TY. Note that in Figure 3- 16, 12 tributaries are enabled.
The remaining capacity can be allocated by using the FI XED CAPACI TY
drop-down menu. If you want traffic to go on both Ports 1 & 2, ENABLE Port
Segregation and then ENABLE the ports.
5. Once you have enabled the ports, you have a choice of defining the traffic. Select the
appropriate number from the FI XED CAPACI TY drop-down menu. If you chose
mix58DS1, for example, and you have enabled all 16 tributaries on the Tributaries
tab, then you will have 42 DS1 allocated to the Ethernet ports. This can then be
distributed evenly between the two ports, or you can put more on one and less on
the other. For example, if the Used Capacity is 29DS1 and 12 tributaries are
enabled, that will leave 17 DS1 available to split between Port 1 and Port 2. I f you
h a ve bot h a loca l a n d a r em ot e s it e, t h e n u m ber of En a b led t r ibu t a r ies
MUST BE THE SAME for t h e m a xim u m n u m ber of t r ibu t a r ies t o
a p p ea r .
For an et hernet connect ion, Harr is St rat ex Net works recommends t hat all
ext ernal device( s) you use support aut o- negot iat ion. I f t he ext ernal
device does not support aut o- negot iat ion, t hen t he ext ernal device
should be configured as 100 Mbit s/ s full- duplex. Also, if only one
connect ion is being made, Harr is St rat ex Net works recommends t hat you
disable Port Segr egat ion.
6. For further segregation, click on the QoS Map tab. The QoS Map allows Ethernet
traffic quality of service priorities to be set. If you want to set these traffic priorities,
make sure that the appropriate priorities are enabled on the Ethernet Ports tab (see
Figure 3- 18).
7. To change a priority, select a priority level by clicking on it. The choices are Best
Effort, High, Medium, or Low. A black frame will show which priority has been
chosen (see Figure A- 6). Click within each of the tables to change the priority of
I MN- 903003- E07 June 2008 3- 27
TRuepoi nt

5000 & 4040 Oper at or I nt er f ace


that group, level or port. The color for the group, level or port will change to show
the new priority. To save your changes, press Apply. For a description of the
priority tables, refer to Table A- 8.
Tr i but ar i es w i t h a ADS1 ADM over DS3 MUX
When you have an Add-Drop MUX, you will see a different screen with several sections
as seen in Figure 3- 19. The add/ drop screen allows you to select which time slot of the
DS3 signal will be dropped to one of the DS1 tributaries and allows you to select which
DS1 tributary will be added to the DS3 signal.
Since the ADM screen is large, you can look at the header to see which site (local or
remote) is shown, and if you have a 2+0 system, which side is shown. The buttons
directly below the header allow you to browse to the other site and/ or side.
Table 3-8. ADM Opt ions
Scr een Ar ea Avai l abl e Act i on
Main View Shows t he overall st at us. Click on a t ime slot or t ribut ary t o
act ivat e a sub view.
Time Slot View Shows t he last clicked t ime slot .
Tribut ary View Select a t ribut ary by clicking on it in t he Main view or by
select ing t he number from t he drop- down menu in t he
Configurat ion sect ion.
Showing Sect ion Select t he appropriat e box show or hide t he opt ions in t he
Main View.
Configurat ion
Sect ion
Select t he appropriat e t ribut ary from t he drop- down
menus. The OK but t on will apply t he lat est user input s t o
t he screen; t he Clear but t on will erase all user input s since
Apply was last used.
3- 28 Har r i s St r at ex Net w or k s
Chapt er 3. Conf i gur i ng and Oper at i ng t he Radi o
Figure 3-19. ADM Tribut ary screen
TPC Mode
Transmit Power Control (TPC) allows you to adjust the TX output power to the
necessary level in order to provide reliable signal reception at the remote end of the RF
link.
Go to CONFI GURATI ON > RADI O > TPC and select the TPC mode: Manual Control,
ATPC, or DTPC. The configuration points mentioned below can be entered on this page
as well.
HHT: CONFI GURATI ON > SYSTEM > OUTPUT POWER > TPC MODE.
Ma n u a l Con t r ol is the default mode, and allows you to adjust the Tx output power to
the desired level by setting the Tx St at ic At t enuat ion for RFU A and RFU B. The
range is from 0-30 dB, in 0.5 dB increments. If you have a TR4040 23 GHz QPSK, the
attenuation should be set no higher than 24dB.
I MN- 903003- E07 June 2008 3- 29
TRuepoi nt

5000 & 4040 Oper at or I nt er f ace


ATPC mode allows the radio to operate at a low output power that is enough to provide
reliable signal reception at the remote end of the RF link. However, when a fading
condition occurs and the RSL at the remote end is approaching the system threshold,
the Tx output power increases to a predetermined high output power level. When the
fading condition is over and the RSL at the remote end is far enough below the system
threshold, the Tx output power returns to the low level.
To set up ATPC, you must set the nominal power level using Tx St at ic At t enuat ion.
Then you define the Remot e ATPC Low Threshold Offset (0-25 dB) and the Boost
St ep (0-15 dB). When the RSL level drops below the system threshold plus the ATPC
low threshold, the receiver will set the boost request flag and send it to the transmitter.
If allowed, the transmitter will increase the Tx output power by the number set in the
Boost St ep. When the RSL at the receiver increases above the system threshold plus
the ATPC high threshold, the receiver clears the boost request flag and sends it back to
the transmitter, which in turn returns Tx output power bock to the nominal power
level.
Figure 3- 20 illustrates various parameters related to ATPC mode; the dashed line
shows that without ATPC, the RSL would go below the system threshold.
Figure 3-20. ATPC Paramet er s
DTPC mode allows you to specify a target remote end RSL value that provides reliable
signal reception. Tx output power is automatically adjusted to maintain this specified
target remote end RSL, by comparing the received remote RSL with the Remot e
Nominal RSL value and adjusting accordingly.
The nominal power level set via Tx St at ic At t enuat ion serves as a starting point. Tx
output power can be decreased if nominal power is not needed to maintain the Remot e
Nominal RSL value, but the Tx output power will never go above the nominal power
level.
Figure 3- 21 illustrates various parameters related to DTPC mode; the dashed line
shows RSL as it would be without DTPC.
RF signal
Pmin
dLow
Tx Output Power (dBm)
Pmax
Transmitter
Time
Pmax - max_atten
dHigh
Rx RSL (dBm)
System Threshold
Time
Receiver
Pcoord
Boost request flag
Pnom
Exceed time
ATPC
Step
Pmax - static_atten
t1 t2
Low threshold
High threshold
t1 t2
Phigh
3- 30 Har r i s St r at ex Net w or k s
Chapt er 3. Conf i gur i ng and Oper at i ng t he Radi o
Figure 3-21. DTPC Paramet ers
For definitions of all TPC Mode configurable parameters, please see Chapt er 7.
Secur i t y
Software version 6.x.x offers the option of selecting BASI C or STRONG security.
Software version 7.xx or higher offers BASI C, STRONG mid-encryption, or STRONG
high-encryption security.
The BASI C security mode supports SNMPv1; the STRONG security modes support
SNMPv3, HTTPS and FTPS over TSL, and a RADIUS Server.
BASI C is the default. All modes support an Attack Prevention Mechanism. You have to
have the Change Permissions permission level (see Table 3- 9) in order to change the
security level.
Local User s
To create a new user, go to SECURI TY > USER AUTHORI ZATI ON.
As noted before, the default user is a d m in and the default password is 1234 5 if you
have software version 4.5 or lower/ 1234 56 78 if you have software version 6.x or
higher. This screen allows you to change your default user name and password as well
as set up additional users.
To change the default name, click on the word a d m in so it is highlighted and click the
EDI T button. Then you can enter a new name longer than 3 but no greater than 10
alphanumeric characters.
To add a new user, click on the CREATE button. Once you have done that, enter the
user NAME (up to 10 alphanumeric characters) and PASSWORD (longer than 8 but
no greater than 32 characters), confirm the PASSWORD, and select the appropriate
permission level. Click ADD to add that user.
To change a users access privileges, simply select a different permission level. Click
UPDATE to make the appropriate changes. The available permission levels are listed
in Table 3- 9.
Pmin
Tx Output Power (dBm)
Pmax
Transmitter
Time
Pmax - max_atten
Rx RSL (dBm)
System Threshold
Time
Receiver
Pcoord
RF signal
RSL feedback
Pnom
Exceed time at t5
Pmax -
static_atten
t4 t5 t1 t2 t1 t2 t3 t5 t4 t3
RSL delta
target RSL
Desired Tx
Power
I MN- 903003- E07 June 2008 3- 31
TRuepoi nt

5000 & 4040 Oper at or I nt er f ace


Table 3-9. Permission Levels
To delete a user, click on the user you want to delete so that the user is highlighted and
then click the DELETE button.
Figure 3-22. User Aut horizat ion
HHT: CONFI GURATI ON > SECURI TY > LOCAL USERS.
Level Capabi l i t y
No Access The user cannot access t he radio.
Read- Only The user can access t he radio but only t o monit or t he st at us,
cont rol, performance and configurat ion values.
Execut e
Cont rols
The user has all t he privileges of t he Read- Only level plus t he
abilit y t o change t he cont rol values.
Soft ware
Upgrade
The user has all t he privileges of t he Execut e Cont rols level
plus t he abilit y t o upgrade t he soft ware running in t he syst em.
Change Config The user has all t he privileges of t he Soft ware Upgrade level
plus t he abilit y t o change t he configurat ion of t he syst em
except for user aut horizat ion paramet ers.
Change
Permissions
The user has all t he privileges of t he Change Config level plus
t he abilit y t o change t he user aut horizat ion paramet ers.
3- 32 Har r i s St r at ex Net w or k s
Chapt er 3. Conf i gur i ng and Oper at i ng t he Radi o
At t ack Pr event i on
Go to SECURI TY > SECURI TY PARAMETER (see Figure 3- 23). Login Attack
Prevention is available in both BASI C and STRONG modes, and is designed to prevent
problems due to an attack from an unauthorized user. When this feature is ENABLED,
once the FAI LED LOGI N ATTEMPTS THRESHOLD (a number between 1 and 255)
has been reached within the ATTACK WI NDOW time period (0-2880 min.), any
further authorization attempts will be locked out for the LOGI N BLOCK- OUT
PERI OD (0-60 sec.). The default values appear in Figure 3- 23.
Figure 3-23. Securit y Paramet ers, BASI C securit y
STRONG Secur i t y Par amet er s
If you want stronger security, go to SECURI TY > SECURI TY PARAMETER, change
the security mode to STRONG, and click APPLY. Both of the strong security options
require a software key.
The STRONG secur i t y modes use encr y pt i on, so w hen y ou change
t he mode f r om BASI C t o STRONG, y ou may need t o r el oad t he
Web- CI T usi ng ht t ps r at her t han ht t p.
SNMPv3 Conf i gur at i on
Once you have selected STRONG, you will be able to set up SNMPv3 Configuration by
entering the default user authorization and privacy passwords. These passwords must
be from 8-18 characters.
If you have the software key for STRONG high-encryption security, you can select the
protocols as well. These include:
Authentication Protocol (HMAC-MD5 or HMAC-SHA).
Privacy Protocol (CBC-DES or CFB-AES-128).
I MN- 903003- E07 June 2008 3- 33
TRuepoi nt

5000 & 4040 Oper at or I nt er f ace


Figure 3-24. Securit y Paramet ers, STRONG mid- encrypt ion securit y
HHT: CONFI GURATI ON > NETWORK MANAGEMENT > SNMP > AUTH
PROTOCOL/ PRI V PROTOCOL.
TLS/ SSL Ci pher Sui t es
If you have STRONG high-encryption security, you also can configure the TLS/ SSL
cipher suites. These suites define the encryption that wil be used for HTTP, FTP and
Telnet connections. They are used by the HTTP server while establishing secure
sessions with a Web browser. The possible cipher suites are:
SSL_RSA_WITH_DES_CBC_SHA
SSL_RSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA
SSL_DHE_RSA_ WITH_DES_CBC_SHA
SSL_DHE_RSA_ WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_ SHA
TLS_ RSA_WITH_AES_ 128_CBC_ SHA
TLS_ DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA
TLS_ RSA_WITH_AES_ 256_CBC_SHA
TLS_ DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA
You can select multiple cipher suites; at least one must be selected at all times.
3- 34 Har r i s St r at ex Net w or k s
Chapt er 3. Conf i gur i ng and Oper at i ng t he Radi o
Figure 3-25. Securit y Paramet ers, STRONG high- encrypt ion securit y
HHT: CONFI GURATI ON > SECURI TY > TLS/ SSL CI PHERS.
Radi us Cl i ent
STRONG security also allows you to access Radius Client Configuration, which allows
you to access the Radius server, which in turn allows you to create a user on the server.
This information is then disseminated to all radios on the server so you do not have to
go to each radio and add a specific user. If you ENABLE Server Access, as seen in
Figure 3- 26, then the system will get its information from the Radius Server, and a
user can login to any radio from any interface if that user is in the server list. If it is not
enabled, then only local users can access the system.
I MN- 903003- E07 June 2008 3- 35
TRuepoi nt

5000 & 4040 Oper at or I nt er f ace


Figure 3-26. Radius Client Configurat ion
HHT: CONFI GURATI ON > SECURI TY > RADI US CLI ENT.
Cached Account s
Cached accounts contain information obtained from the RADIUS server that is cached
locally for authentication and user authorization during a temporary absence of access
to the server. A user name and password can be entered as required; the default user
name and password fields contain an empty string. The user name and password
obtained from the RADIUS server is cached for a configurable length of time. This
function is not available when the radiusClient is disabled.
Conf i gur at i on Fi l e Pr ot ect i on
In software version 6.x and higher, a configuration file is used which contains sensitive
information. In addition, this file is encrypted so that an unauthorized user cannot gain
information which would allow remote access to the system. The encryption is linked
to the memory card.
3- 36 Har r i s St r at ex Net w or k s
Chapt er 3. Conf i gur i ng and Oper at i ng t he Radi o
Addi t i onal Web- CI T Opt i ons
Tr ansmi t t er Sw i t chi ng
Transmitter switching is a protective mechanism which is triggered automatically in
the event of a hardware failure. It can also be initiated manually. The following
limitations apply:
When the revertive transmitter switching option is enabled the Reverse channel
switching option is disabled by the software.
When the Reverse channel switching option is enabled the revertive transmitter
switching option is disabled.
Rever t i ve Tr ansmi t t er Sw i t chi ng
Revertive switching automatically switches back to the original configuration when the
fault is resolved (no alarm) and the channel becomes available.
Go to CONFI GURATI ON > CONTROLS > SYSTEM ONLI NE and turn Tx Revert
t o A Swit ch ON.
HHT: CONTROL > SWI TCH
Tr ansmi t t er Rever se Channel Sw i t chi ng ( RCS)
Reverse Channel Switching (RCS) allows you to protect the system against a
transmitter silent failure and is available with MHSB or SD protection.
In a 1+1 protected MHSB system or SD system, RCS is a method of automatically
switching to a standby transmit channel initiated by the corresponding receive end
when the traffic outage occurs at the receive end. When only one transmitter is
transmitting, the controller at the receive end issues a request to the transmit end to
initiate transmitter switching when the online demultiplexer at the receive end
experiences a synchronization alarm. If there is no higher switching priority for
transmitter switching, the controller at the transmit end initiates switching to the
standby channel.
RCS is useful for preventing a prolonged traffic outage in the event of a silent failure at
the transmit end.
Go to CONFI GURATI ON > SYSTEM and select the RCS mode: Simple or Smart. You
can also choose DISABLE, which will exclude the RCS state machine from the
switching algorithm.
Both SIMPLE and SMART provide protection against a transmitter silent failure.
SMART will switch back and forth to check if the problem is a path or an equipment
failure while SIMPLE will not.
RCS Delay allows you to set a value between 0-20 seconds (in increments of 2 seconds)
which determines how fast RCS will occur after the switching condition is detected.
I MN- 903003- E07 June 2008 3- 37
TRuepoi nt

5000 & 4040 Oper at or I nt er f ace


When a Remote Sync Loss alarm appears in the system, the system waits the RCS delay
time to see if the traffic has recovered. If the traffic has recovered, no switching occurs.
It the traffic has not recovered, then the system switches the traffic from TxA (or B) to
TxB (or A). In SIMPLE mode, this pattern continues until the traffic has recovered.
Once the traffic is recovered no more switching occurs.
In SMART mode, the same pattern occurs at first. However, if the Remote Sync Loss
Alarm clears after the first switch takes place and the traffic is recovered, the system
then does another switch to check for a path failure. If the traffic is still recovered after
the second switch, no more switching takes place. If the traffic is still lost, a third switch
takes place and a Tx Silent Failure alarm is raised.
HHT: CONFI GURATI ON > SYSTEM > SPU > RCS MODE/ RCS DELAY.
Recei ver Sw i t chi ng
Receiver switching is a protection mechanism triggered automatically in the event of a
hardware failure or in the event of path failure (flat fading or selective fading). It can
also be initiated manually.
Go to CONFI GURATI ON > CONTROL > SYSTEM > Rx Decoder or Rx Dade/
Demux and select SWI TCH.
HHT: CONTROL > SWI TCH and select RX/ DECDR OR RXD/ DMUX.
Opt i onal Car ds
Go to CONFI GURATI ON > OPTI ONAL CARDS.
If you do not have any Optional cards in your system, a N/ A will appear next to the
Option Card box on the screen.
If you do have Optional cards, the type of Optional Card will appear on the screen and
you will have the option of whether to use it or not by clicking on the check box next to
the name of the card.
HHT: Depending on the type of Optional card you have, CONFI GURATI ON >
RELAYS or CONFI GURATI ON > EXTERNAL ALARMS or CONFI GURATI ON >
ORDERWI RE.
Sy st em I nf or mat i on
The first three entries on the CONFI GURATI ON > SYSTEM page are NAME,
LOCATI ON, and CONTACT. Please note that these fields can contain up to 126
characters only.
3- 38 Har r i s St r at ex Net w or k s
Chapt er 3. Conf i gur i ng and Oper at i ng t he Radi o
Dat a Sheet
Go to CONFI GURATI ON > I NVENTORY > DATA SHEET.
The Data Sheet page displays inventory information about the radio, as seen in Figure
3- 27. If you want to print this information, select the Save Page as File button as seen
on the right hand side of Figure 3- 27. The information will be saved as a Comma
Separated Value file which can then be imported into applications such as Microsoft
Excel.
There are four data fields that you can fill out as seen on the left hand side of Figure
3- 27 for printing purposes only. These fields are Customer Name, Rack Number, Site
Name, and AGC voltage.
Figure 3-27. Dat a Sheet
There is no equivalent to the Data Sheet in the HHT. However, the STATUS branch
contains most of the same information.
I MN- 903003- E07 June 2008 3- 39
TRuepoi nt

5000 & 4040 Oper at or I nt er f ace


Ti me Management
Go to CONFI GURATI ON > TI ME MANAGEMENT.
The time management screen allows you to configure the radio's clock. The clock can
be set independently or can be synchronized with a SNTP (Simple Network Time
Protocol) server. This insures that its clock is in sync with other network elements
sharing the same SNTP server.
Figure 3-28. Time Management Screen
HHT: CONFI GURATI ON > TI ME MANAGEMENT.
3- 40 Har r i s St r at ex Net w or k s
Chapt er 3. Conf i gur i ng and Oper at i ng t he Radi o
Net w or k Management
Harris Stratex Networks point-to-point equipment is designed to work with standard
protocols over standard media and with Harris Stratex Networks legacy products using
the proprietary SCAN and Netcom protocols. TRuepoint supports an IP network (the
Web- CI T, SNMP, FTP), a Netcom network, and a SCAN network.
You can connect a TRuepoint radio to other Harris Stratex Networks point-to-point
radios via the NTWRK or LAN port to another Ethernet port (another TRuepoint,
MicroStar Type II, or Constellation), via the HDLC serial port to a RPTR_OUT serial
port (MicroStar Type I or Type III), or via Port 1 to a SPUR (AUX) port (MegaStar -
Farscan only).
Furthermore, in a TRuepoint 5000 network, a mix of links using the V1 Controller and
links using the V2 Controller are possible without any restrictions. It is also possible to
mix both a V1 and a V2 on a hop, but the capability of the link will be driven by the least
powerful Controller.
Figure 3-29. Example of a net work wit h connect ions t o ot her Harris St rat ex
Net works radios
Figure 3-30. Connect ion Point s fr om Figure 3- 29
Mi cr oSt ar Ty pe I I
Mi cr oSt ar Type I
Const el l at i on
TRuepoi nt
TRuepoi nt
TRuepoi nt
TRuepoi nt
Mi cr oSt ar Ty pe I I
Mi cr oSt ar Ty pe I
Net com ov er Et her net
Net com over RF
Net com ov er HDLC
Const ellat ion backplane: Et hernet port
TRuepoint cont roller: NTWRK & LAN port s
MicroSt ar Type I : RPTR ( OUT) MicroSt ar Type I I : Et hernet port
I MN- 903003- E07 June 2008 3- 41
TRuepoi nt

5000 & 4040 Oper at or I nt er f ace


For an et her net connect ion, we recommend t hat all ext ernal device( s)
you use support aut o- negociat ion. I f t he ext ernal device does not support
aut o- negociat ion, t hen t he ext ernal device should be configured as 10
Mbit s/ s half duplex.
For more information on connecting the TRuepoint radio to other radios, please refer
to Appendix B of the S PU I n s t a lla t i on Manual, IMN-903002-Exx.
Net w or k Conf i gur at i on
The Netcom protocol uses an addressing scheme based upon the NE address. Each
radio in the network should have its own NE address and messages can be sent to any
node in the network by using that NE address. Each radio also needs an IP address
which can be assigned manually or automatically based on the NE address.
Each radio has an Ethernet IP interface as well that has an IP address which can be
assigned manually, automatically based on the Netcom NE address, or automatically
using a DHCP Server. The Ethernet address is needed for connection to the Web- CI T
and other customer equipment.
The NE address must be unique within a Netcom cloud. The Netcom cloud extends
from a given radio to all neighbor radios connected to the given radio over air link, by
Ethernet, or via a HDLC port. NE addresses can be re-used within different subnet
clouds.
In order to break the Netcom cloud between two radios, you must make sure that the
radios are not linked by air link nor connected via HDLC or Ethernet. If two radios are
connected via Ethernet ports, you can break the Netcom cloud by disabling Netcom
over Ethernet. When this is disabled, the two radios cannot talk via Netcom but can talk
via IP.
The following information describes how to configure your local radio for networking.
To connect to and configure remote radios through the Web- CI T, DHCP must be
enabled on the Netcom interfaces, and the Ethernet interface of the remote radio must
be configured.
For Network configuration, go to CONFI GURATI ON > I P ROUTI NG > NETWORK
I NTERFACES in the Web- CI T. The NETCOM I P I NTERFACE should be set to
ENABLE. Under MODE, select Au t o or Ma n u a l. Auto is the default and will
automatically generate the Netcom IP address and subnet mask for each radio based
on the NE address. For example, if the radios NE address is 333, then the Netcom IP
address will be 172.23.33.1. If you select Manual, you will need to enter a Netcom IP
address and subnet mask in the appropriate boxes.
The Netcom IP MTU size can be set to either 1500 or 236. This setting must be the same
for all radios in your Netcom network. 236 is the default and must be selected if you
have a V1 controller, TR4000, or TR4040 in the network.
Still in CONFI GURATI ON > I P ROUTI NG > NETWORK I NTERFACES, the
ETHERNET I NTERFACE should be set to ENABLE as well. Under MODE, select Au t o,
Ma n u a l, or DHCP.
3- 42 Har r i s St r at ex Net w or k s
Chapt er 3. Conf i gur i ng and Oper at i ng t he Radi o
Au t o is the default and will automatically generate the Ethernet IP address and subnet
mask for each radio based on the NE address. For example, if the radios NE address is
333, then the Ethernet IP address will be 10.3.33.1. See Figure 3- 31.
You also can elect to use the DHCP Server in the radio in order to configure other
equipment such as a laptop or NMS. The DHCP Server will generate an IP address that
in turn will grant a lease to a laptop (or other equipment) plugged into the Ethernet
port on the radio. To use this option, select Au t o for MODE, and then ENABLE the
DHCP SERVER.
If you select Ma n u a l, you will need to enter a Ethernet IP address and subnet mask in
the appropriate boxes.
If you select DHCP, you will need to have a DHCP server on your network. With this
option, the radio becomes a DHCP client on your pre-existing network and the
Ethernet IP interface will request an IP address from a DHCP server.
I f you reconfigure t he I P set t ings ( change from Aut o t o DHCP for
example) , it is recommended t hat you perform a soft ware boot .
Figure 3-31. Example showing t he aut omat ic Net com and Et hernet I P
configurat ion based on t he NE addresses
HHT: CONFI GURATI ON > NETWORK MANAGEMENT > I P ROUTI NG.
I MN- 903003- E07 June 2008 3- 43
TRuepoi nt

5000 & 4040 Oper at or I nt er f ace


Rout i ng
Each TRuepoint radio can be viewed as an IP router with two interfaces: Ethernet and
Netcom.
In order to configure the router, the user has three options. The first option is to disable
routing altogether and use a piece of third party equipment at each site to connect to
each radios Ethernet interface for management.
The second option is to define the network with a user-defined static routing table on
each radio. This is applicable to very small networks only since there are 10 maximum
static routes that can be defined. To use this option, go to CONFI GURATI ON > I P
ROUTI NG > STATI C ROUTI NG. Enter the IP address, mask, and next IP router for
each static route that you want to use.
HHT: CONFI GURATI ON > NETWORK MANAGEMENT > I P ROUTI NG > STATI C
ROUTES.
The third option involves dynamic routing. The TRuepoint radio supports the RI P
dynamic routing protocol which is a simple dynamic routing protocol that will
broadcast all of its known routes periodically to the rest of the network. Each router
receiving these updates can update their own routing tables with this information. The
RI P daemon on the TRuepoint radio is configured to supply routes when more than one
interface is enabled on the TRuepoint radio. The routes can be selectively broadcast on
either or both of the Netcom or Ethernet interfaces. When enabled, routing updates
will be sent every 30 seconds. Any received route that is not updated within 180
seconds will expire and be removed from the routing table. The RI P daemon can be
configured in three different modes: disabled, Version 2 broadcast, or Version 2
multicast. The disabled mode disables all RI P operations. Version 2 sends and receives
only RIPv2 updates which support classless addressing and variable length subnet
masks.
HHT: CONFI GURATI ON > NETWORK MANAGEMENT > I P ROUTI NG >
DYNAMI C ROUTI NG.
Dat a Tr ansmi ssi on Pr ot ocol s
The various protocols which can be used for data transmission are described in this
subsection along with any limitation of use.
TLS
The TLS protocol is based on the SSL ver. 3.0 specification published by Netscape. The
TRuepoint supports TLS version 1.0 per RFC2246 and uses the NE certificate for
authentication. The TRuepoint accepts a TLS connection only if the security mode is set
to strong.
3- 44 Har r i s St r at ex Net w or k s
Chapt er 3. Conf i gur i ng and Oper at i ng t he Radi o
Tel net and Tel net over SSL/ TLS
When a Telnet connection is established, a VT-100 session is automatically started and
the user is prompted for the required login. The VT-100 interface accessed by Telnet or
by a terminal emulator allows a 20 column x 24 line screen and the ability to enter any
alphanumeric character that is available from a keyboard. The type of connection
depends on the security mode settings, as follows:
Basic security mode can only be used if the connection is not encapsulated
Strong security mode the connection must be encapsulated in TLS.
HTTP/ HTTPS
The type of connection depends on the security mode settings, as follows:
Basic security mode a CIT session is started using HTTP
Strong security mode A HTTPS over TLS connection is started which is
encapsulated.
FTP/ FTPS
The type of connection depends on the security mode settings, as follows:
Basic security mode This requires a user name and password before completing the
data connection request.
Strong security mode This requires a TLS connection with the client and a user
name and password is required.
FTP can only be used wit h t he Micr owave Soft ware Upgrade Ut ilit y
( MSUU) and Paperless Chart Recorder ( PCR) ut ilit y programs which ar e
supplied by Harris St rat ex Net works.
SNMP
The type of connection depends on the security mode settings, as follows:
Basic security mode The SNMPv1 agent will reject all the SNMPv3 PDUs.
Strong security mode The SNMPv3 agent will accept and transmit data using the
SNMPv1 security model. However, the default values are set so by default it is the
SNMPv1 security model that is used to ease transition between the security models
in the network.
SCAN
The FarSCAN and the ESCAN protocols are not secure, therefore, the system will not
respond to requests unless security is set to basic. The maximum level of access is to
access files.
I MN- 903003- E07 June 2008 3- 45
TRuepoi nt

5000 & 4040 Oper at or I nt er f ace


SNMP
Each TRuepoint radio has an embedded SNMP agent on board allowing the user to
configure, control and monitor the system using a remote station that supports SNMP
Network Management.
To set up SNMP managers or trap destinations, go to SECURI TY > SNMP
MANAGERS or TRAP DESTI NATI ONS. You may enter up to 10 SNMP managers and
up to 10 trap destinations. To set up trap parameters, go to CONFI GURATI ON >
NETWORK MANAGEMENT > TRAP PARAMETERS. For a complete list of traps,
please see page 5- 13.
HHT: CONFI GURATI ON > NETWORK MANAGEMENT > SNMP.
The Get and Set community strings need to be configured as well if you do not want to
use the defaults of public for Get community and private for Set community. Get
and Set community can be modified only through a VT-100 terminal. To modify these,
go to CONFI GURATI ON > NETWORK MANAGEMENT > SNMP > COMMUNI TY
STRI NGS. Enter the name you want using the VT-100 terminal.
The SNMP protocol was developed to provide an easy to implement network
management tool. The TRuepoint SNMP agent supports SNMPv1, v2c, and v3. The
SNMP manager is usually running on a computer at the network operation center. An
STNP agent is embedded in the NE.
A terminal that is configured as SNMPv3 (strong security) will reject any unsecured
SNMPv1 commands that are addressed to that terminal. However, the terminal will let
SNMPv1 commands pass through. Likewise, a SNMPv1 terminal will let SNMPv3
commands pass through but will reject any SNMPv3 commands that are addressed to
that terminal.
3- 46 Har r i s St r at ex Net w or k s
Chapt er 3. Conf i gur i ng and Oper at i ng t he Radi o
I MN- 903003- E07 June 2008 4- 1
Chapt er 4. Upgr ades
I nt r oduct i on
This chapter is designed to guide you through the options you have when upgrading
your software and firmware. Harris Stratex Networks provides two utilities that
provide many different options of upgrading your system.
The Micr owave Soft ware Upgrade Ut ilit y (MSUU) offers the following options for
upgrading your software and firmware:
Single- host Upgrade
Multi-host Upgrade
1
Direct Flash Upgrade
ESCAN Upgrade
In addition, the following tools are also available through the MSUU:
Configuration Backup/ Restore
Customization
Software Key
The MSUU is designed to run with Windows 2000.
The Configurat ion Transfer Ut ilit y (CTU) gives you the ability to upgrade from a V1
to a V2 Controller or downgrade from a V2 to a V1 Controller without losing your
configuration files.
If you are upgrading from software version 4.x or lower to 6.x or higher you will need
the V2 Controller. You cannot upgrade the software without purchasing a V2 controller
because the V1 controller does not support software version 6.x and higher.
Please refer to the S PU I n s t a lla t i on manual, IMN-903002-Exx for information on
upgrading the Controller.
I t i s st r ongl y r ecommended t hat y ou upgr ade t o t he l at est
TRuepoi nt sof t w ar e bef or e sw appi ng any spar e par t s. Thi s w i l l
ensur e t hat y our sy st em can r ecogni ze t he l at est har dw ar e.
If you have software version 7.6.1 or higher, it is recommended that you do not
downgrade your software to a lower version. If you have any questions, please contact
our Technical Assistance Center (see Cont act I nformat ion).
1
Fut ure availabilit y
4- 2 Har r i s St r at ex Net w or k s
Chapt er 4. Upgr ades
If you want to transfer your configuration data from one flash card to another, and you
are not changing the Controller type, you can use the Direct Flash Upgrade tab of the
MSUU. See Configurat ion Dat a Transfer.
To backup your configuration files from your flash card or from a remote site, use the
Configurat ion Backup/ Rest ore tab of the MSUU.
When y ou t r ansf er dat a f r om one car d t o anot her , or back up t he
conf i g. dat f i l e, or k eep a spar e car d, mak e sur e t hat al l f l ash car ds
ar e pur chased f r om Har r i s St r at ex . Har r i s St r at ex f l ash car ds
hav e been t est ed t o meet cer t ai n speci f i cat i ons. I n ex t r eme
ci r cumst ances, y ou may use a t hi r d par t y f l ash car d, but t hi s may
af f ect per f or mance and Har r i s St r at ex Net w or k s w i l l t ak e no
r esponsi bi l i t y f or l oss of per f or mance or f ai l ur e.
Upgr ade Ki t s
Upgrade kits are available for MUX capacities and for the software features that require
a software key. Contact Harris Stratex Networks Customer Service for more
information on purchasing an upgrade kit. For information on upgrading your
software with a software key, go to Soft ware Key on page 4- 16.
MUX Connect i on
When upgrading from a release earlier than Release 3.x.x of the software to Release
3.x.x software, you may need to change the connection if you have one of the following
multiplexers:
OC3/ STM1
DS3/ E3/ 100BT
If you have one of these two MUXes, and you have a 2 RMS shelf with a SDM installed,
then you will need to reconnect the cables from the MUX face plate to the SDM during
the upgrade to Release 3.x.x.
Mi cr ow ave Sof t w ar e Upgr ade Ut i l i t y
To install the program, extract the files from the MSUU.zip file found on your Harris
Stratex Networks TRuepoint Software CD. Click on the setup.exe file and Figure 4- 1
will appear.
I MN- 903003- E07 June 2008 4- 3
TRuepoi nt

5000 & 4040 Oper at or I nt er f ace


Figure 4-1. MSUU I nst allat ion
Once you have installed the MSUU, a shortcut will appear in your Start Menu under
Programs > Harris Stratex > Microwave Software Upgrade Utility. When you load the
MSUU, a screen similar to Figure 4- 2 will appear.
Figure 4-2. MSUU
4- 4 Har r i s St r at ex Net w or k s
Chapt er 4. Upgr ades
Any t i me y ou sw i t ch t o new sof t w ar e, t he Web- CI T shoul d be
cl osed and r eopened t o mak e sur e t hat any new or updat ed pages
ar e upl oaded.
You can password protect the MSUU. If you want to turn password protection on, go to
the Configuration Menu and then choose MSUU Access. You will need to enter a
password in the New Password and Retype New Password fields and then click the OK
button. To change the password at a later date, follow the same steps. Passwords can
be up to 15 characters.
Once you have set a password, when the MSUU starts up you will see the screen shown
in Figure 4- 3. Enter the password in the appropriate spot and then the Enter key.
Figure 4-3. MSUU password screen
Si ngl e- host Upgr ade
The Single-host Upgrade allows you to upgrade the software and firmware in a specific
Harris Stratex Networks radio. See Figure 4- 2.
1. Click on the ... button and select the appropriate Upgrade Pack file. This will be a
.zip file. Click on the Detail button for the contents of the Upgrade Pack file.
2. Enter the IP Address and SNMP Set Community name of the target radio. If the
MSUU is operating in Strong Security mode, you will need to enter the
authentication and privacy passwords instead of the community name.
I MN- 903003- E07 June 2008 4- 5
TRuepoi nt

5000 & 4040 Oper at or I nt er f ace


Figure 4-4. St rong Securit y opt ion
3. Press the Connect button to get a SNMP connection to the target radio. Once the
connection is established, the software and firmware information will be retrieved
from that radio and the Primary Bank Release version and Alternate Bank Release
versions will appear. Click on the Detail button for more information on the
Primary Bank content and the Alternate Bank content.
4. Enter your user name and password for the target radio. You must be an authorized
user with Software Upgrade permissions. See Securit y on page 3- 30 for more
information.
5. Click the Upgrade button. If the radio has data already in the Alternate Bank
Figure 4- 5 will appear. You must choose whether to transfer all components or
just those that are new and then click the Start button. If there is no software in the
Alternate Bank, the MSUU will automatically transfer all new components. When
the process is done a new window should appear stating that the upgrade process
was successful.
Figure 4-5. Upgrade Mode: Single Host
6. To switch memory banks (restart the radio with the alternate memory bank) select
Alternate System or Alternate Software and then press the Execute button. A
warning message will pop up; click Yes to continue the process.
4- 6 Har r i s St r at ex Net w or k s
Chapt er 4. Upgr ades
The Alt ernat e Syst em opt ion will download t he firmware files as well as
swit ching t he Primary and Alt ernat e banks. This opt ion will int errupt
t raffic. The Alt ernat e Soft ware opt ion only swit ches t he Primary and
Alt ernat e banks and t hus does not affect t raffic.
7. If you only want to download the firmware files to the cards but do not want to
switch the software banks, select Upgrade Firmware. This will upgrade the cards
from the firmware contained in the Primary Bank.
The Upgrade Firmware opt ion cannot be accessed unless t he Alt ernat e
Soft ware opt ion has already been execut ed.
8. Once the restart process has finished, the Equipment, Primary Bank content, and
Alternate Bank content boxes under Detail will be updated.
Di r ect Fl ash Upgr ade
The Direct Flash Upgrade allows you to upgrade the software and firmware in the flash
card by using a flash card reader connected to your PC. If you have the V1 Controller
you have a MMC type flash card. If you have a V2 Controller you have a compact flash
card.
You may use any t ype of reader as long as it support s t he t ype of flash
card you have. For MMC cards, Harris St rat ex Net works recommends a
SanDisk MMC reader.
WARNI NG! ! !
The sof t w ar e f i l es f r om one f l ash car d shoul d nev er be copi ed t o
a PC and t hen t o anot her f l ash car d. Use t he MSUU t o t r ansf er t he
conf i gur at i on dat a f r om one f l ash car d t o anot her ( see
Conf i gur at i on Dat a Tr ansf er ) . The MSUU v al i dat es t he f i l es and
set s a hi dden at t r i but e w hi ch i s r equi r ed f or t he sof t w ar e t o w or k
pr oper l y .
I MN- 903003- E07 June 2008 4- 7
TRuepoi nt

5000 & 4040 Oper at or I nt er f ace


The only file t hat can be copied is a configurat ion file - _CONFI G. DAT file
locat ed in t he CONFI G folder. I f you want t o archive t he configurat ion you
should copy only t his file t o a PC which can be used t o rest ore t he
configurat ion. This can be accomplished by copying t he archived
_CONFI G. DAT file int o t he card which is init ialized during t he soft ware file
inst allat ion process.
Figure 4-6. MSUU: Direct Flash Upgrade
1. Click on the ... button and select the appropriate Upgrade Pack file. This will be a
.zip file. Click on the Detail button for the contents of the Upgrade Pack file.
2. Insert the flash card into the flash card reader. The MSUU will automatically find
the flash card and display the card capacity in the Capacity field as well as the
primary and alternate bank versions. If the flash card has software already, the
primary and alternate bank information will display in the Detail area. See Figure
4- 6.
4- 8 Har r i s St r at ex Net w or k s
Chapt er 4. Upgr ades
I f you have t wo or more card readers on your comput er, t he removable
disk ( mapping t he card reader) should be select ed using t he arrow
but t ons. The current card reader disk is shown in t he Removable Disk
field.
If for some reason the reader does not recognize the flash card, the boxes under
Capacity will stay shaded. See Figure 4- 7.
Figure 4-7. Direct Flash Upgrade: card not recognized
If this happens you have the following two options.
Op t ion 1: From the Task bar, double-click the reader icon and STOP the USB
Mass storage device. Figure 4- 8 should appear. Now unplug the reader and
then plug it back in.
Figure 4-8. St opping t he USB Mass St orage Device
I MN- 903003- E07 June 2008 4- 9
TRuepoi nt

5000 & 4040 Oper at or I nt er f ace


Nev er unpl ug t he r eader f r om a PC or r emov e t he MMC car d f r om
t he r eader w i t hout st oppi ng t he USB Mass st or age dev i ce.
Op t ion 2: Highlight the removable disk in the My Computer window. In the
File menu, select Eject. Now remove the flash card and then reinsert it.
3. Click the Upgrade button. If the radio has data already in the Alternate Bank
Figure 4- 9 will appear. You must choose whether to create a new flash card or just
to replace the data in the alternate bank and then click the Start button. If there is
no software in the Alternate Bank, the MSUU will automatically create a new flash
card.
Figure 4-9. Upgrade Mode: Direct Flash
4. After the upgrade process is finished, a new window will appear asking you to eject
the flash card from the reader.
Conf i gur at i on Dat a Tr ansf er
You can use the Direct Flash Upgrade screen as well to transfer configuration data from
one flash card to another flash card.
Remember t o use onl y a f l ash car d pur chased f r om Har r i s St r at ex
Net w or k s. See t he Caut i on on page 4- 2.
1. Insert the flash card into the flash card reader. The MSUU will automatically find
the flash card and display the card capacity in the Capacity field as well as the
primary and alternate bank versions. If the flash card has software already, the
primary and alternate bank information will display in the Detail area. See Figure
4- 6. If no configuration data is found on the flash card then the CFG Transfer
button will be disabled.
2. Click the CFG Transfer button to start the configuration data transfer. The MSUU
will read the data from the flash card and ask you to insert a new card.
4- 10 Har r i s St r at ex Net w or k s
Chapt er 4. Upgr ades
Figure 4-10. Dat a Transfer
3. When the transfer process is done, a new window will appear asking you to eject the
flash card from the reader.
Only t he configurat ion dat a t hat can be changed wit h t he Web- CI T or t he
HHT will be t ransferred. Any hist ory dat a or t he event log will not be
t ransferred.
ESCAN Upgr ade
The ESCAN Upgrade allows you to upgrade the software and firmware utilizing the
radios ESCAN interface.
Figure 4-11. MSUU: ESCAN Upgrade
1. Click on the ... button and select the appropriate Upgrade Pack file. This will be a
.zip file. Click on the Detail button for the contents of the Upgrade Pack file.
2. Enter the NE Address for the equipment. Make sure that the MSUU NE Address is
filled in as well; the default for the MSUU NE Address is 999.
I MN- 903003- E07 June 2008 4- 11
TRuepoi nt

5000 & 4040 Oper at or I nt er f ace


3. Click on Port Setup. Figure 4- 12 will appear.
Figure 4-12. Port Set up
4. Enter the appropriate settings. The settings you enter should match the COM port
settings in the Harris Stratex Networks Keypad. If you selected a modem for
connection, enter the phone number. Click OK when you are finished.
5. Click Connect. Once you are connected to the equipment, the current software
(primary bank release), the software in the alternative bank, and a description of
the equipment should appear.
6. Enter your user name and password for the target radio in the Upgrade box at the
top right of the screen. You must be an authorized user with the appropriate
security access. See Securit y on page 3- 30 for more information.
7. Enter the sliding window size; the default is 3 and the maximum is 7. If you are
upgrading a radio that is some distance from the current site then you may want to
increase the sliding window size to facilitate a faster download.
8. Click Upgrade. If the equipment already has data in the Alternate Bank, you will
need to select an Upgrade Mode (see Figure 4- 5) and then click Start.
9. Once the download process has finished, a new window should appear stating that
the download/ upgrade process was successful and the Alternate Bank Release
version will be updated.
10. To switch memory banks (restart the radio with the alternate memory bank) select
Alternate System or Alternate Software and then press the Execute button. A
warning message will pop up; click Yes to continue the process.
The Alt ernat e Syst em opt ion will download t he firmware files as well as
swit ching t he Primary and Alt ernat e banks. This opt ion will int errupt
t raffic. The Alt ernat e Soft war e opt ion only swit ches t he Primary and
Alt ernat e banks and t hus does not affect t raffic.
4- 12 Har r i s St r at ex Net w or k s
Chapt er 4. Upgr ades
11. If the firmware components in the cards are different than the firmware
components in the Primary Bank, you can select Upgrade Firmware. This will
upgrade the cards from the firmware contained in the Primary Bank.
The Upgrade Firmware opt ion cannot be accessed unless t he Alt ernat e
Soft ware opt ion has already been execut ed.
12. Once the restart process has finished, the Equipment, Primary Bank content, and
Alternate Bank content boxes under Detail will be updated.
13. When you are done, click Close to exit the program.
Conf i gur at i on Back up/ Rest or e
To back up the configuration data contained on the radio, select the Config Backup/
Restore tab. This allows you to upload the config. dat file from the radio remotely or the
radios flash card using a reader, put it on a local drive, and then restore the file.
Thi s i s a t r af f i c af f ect i ng act i on as i t r eboot s t he Cont r ol l er .
Remember t o use onl y a f l ash car d pur chased f r om Har r i s St r at ex
Net w or k s. See t he Caut i on on page 4- 2.
1. Insert the flash card into a appropriate reader and then select the removable disk.
If you want to get a remote radios config.dat file, enter the appropriate information
under the Remote section and press the Connect button.
I MN- 903003- E07 June 2008 4- 13
TRuepoi nt

5000 & 4040 Oper at or I nt er f ace


Figure 4-13. Config Backup/ Rest ore
2. Once you have chosen the flash card or connected to the remote site, the Primary
and Alternate Bank versions should appear. Click on the Backup button to upload
the information from the radio. You will be asked for information that will aid in
the restore process; see Figure 4- 14.
Figure 4-14. Backup/ Rest ore I nformat ion
4- 14 Har r i s St r at ex Net w or k s
Chapt er 4. Upgr ades
3. Once you have filled out this information, press the Backup button to continue the
process. You will then be asked for a password (8-32 characters) that will be used
to access the configuration data that will be stored on the local drive. Press the OK
button to continue.
4. You will be prompted to enter a file name; this file will have a .caf extension. The
MSUU will decrypt the file and then re-encrypt it to put on the local drive.
5. To restore the file, insert a flash card into a reader or connect to a remote radio as
you did for the Backup process. Click on the Restore button.
6. Select the backup file as shown in Figure 4- 15 and click the Restore button to
continue. You will then be prompted to enter the password that you specified in the
Backup process. If you enter the wrong password 3 times then the restore process
will be cancelled.
Figure 4-15. Select a Backup File
7. Once you have entered your password, click OK to continue. The MSUU will then
save the file back to the radio.
Cust omi zat i on
The Customization tab in the MSUU allows you to update custom defined data in the
radio. There are two type of customization data:
Pre-authentication Banner: This is a text message that appears on your web browser
as soon as a HTTP connection is made with the radio, before the Web-CIT login
prompt.
Post-authentication Banner: This is a text message that appears on your web browser
after a user has been authorized to access the radio.
I MN- 903003- E07 June 2008 4- 15
TRuepoi nt

5000 & 4040 Oper at or I nt er f ace


Figure 4-16. Cust omizat ion
1. Connect to the radio by entering the IP address, user name, and password and then
clicking the Connect button.
2. If there are any banners present already, these will shown in the appropriate boxes
under Detail. See Figure 4- 16.
3. To specify a file that contains the banner text, click on the ... button and select the
appropriate text file. Once you select a file, the checkbox next to the file name will
be automatically checked. If you want to remove an existing banner, uncheck the
check box.
4. To edit the banner text, click the Edit button. Make your changes and save.
5. Click on the Update Radio button to upload the information to the radio. As long as
the checkbox is checked, the MSUU will transfer the data to the radio and set it as
a banner. When the process is complete the Detail boxes will be updated.
4- 16 Har r i s St r at ex Net w or k s
Chapt er 4. Upgr ades
Sof t w ar e Key
Once you have purchased a software key you will need to upload it to your radio using
the MSUU. There are two types of software keys:
Table 4-1. Soft ware Keys
1. Select the SW Key tab.
2. Enter the IP Address, User name, Password, and Set Community to connect to the
radio that is going to be upgraded. If you are in Strong security mode, you will need
to enter the Auth and Priv passwords instead of the Set Community. Click Connect
to connect to the radio.
Figure 4-17. Soft ware Key Tab
3. Once you are connected, the Primary and Alternate Bank versions will appear as
well as the Flash Card serial number of the radio (see Figure 4- 18). This serial
number is a unique number for the specific flash card. If you click on the number,
it will automatically copy to the clipboard.
Ty pe of
Sof t w ar e Key
Used f or :
Feat ure ( 1 per
t erminal)
Adding on feat ures t o your syst em such as St rong Securit y;
see Soft ware Compat ibilit y & Feat ures on page 3- 1.
Airlink Capacit y
( 1 per MUX)
Adding airlink capacit y t o a 2- 16 E1, 4- 16 DS1, NxE1/
DS1+ 2x10- 100BASE- T.
I MN- 903003- E07 June 2008 4- 17
TRuepoi nt

5000 & 4040 Oper at or I nt er f ace


Figure 4-18. SW Key screen: Connect ed t o radio
4. If you do not already have your software key file, you will need to email this serial
number to Harris Stratex Networks Customer Service who will then generate a
software key file for you and email it back. If you do have a software key file, and
you want to verify it, click on the Verify SW Key File button.
5. Click on the Set SW Key button. Select the software key file that you received from
Harris Stratex Networks Customer Service. The software key will install on your
radio and then the radio will reboot.
6. If you already have a software key and you want to upgrade it, you can use the Get
SW Key button to get the software key file off of the flash card, save it, and then
email it to Harris Stratex Networks Customer Service. They will upgrade it and
send it back to be uploaded using the Set SW Key button.
You CANNOT upl oad t he sof t w ar e k ey di r ect l y on t o t he f l ash car d
usi ng a f l ash car d r eader . The sof t w ar e k ey w i l l not w or k .
If the software key file does not match the serial number of your flash card, you will get
an error message and the software key will not work.
4- 18 Har r i s St r at ex Net w or k s
Chapt er 4. Upgr ades
Conf i gur at i on Tr ansf er Ut i l i t y
The Configuration Transfer Utility (CTU) is designed to transfer configuration files
from one type of Controller (V1 or V2) to a different type of Controller. To install the
program, extract the files from the CTU.zip file found on your Harris Stratex Networks
TRuepoint Software CD. Once you have installed the CTU, a shortcut will appear in
your Start Menu under Programs > Harris Stratex > Configuration Transfer Utility.
When you load the CTU, a screen similar to Figure 4- 19 will appear.
Figure 4-19. CTU
There are three possible actions: Create a new Flash Card, transfer configuration data
from one flash card to another, or do both of these actions as one step.
Remember t o use onl y a f l ash car d pur chased f r om Har r i s St r at ex
Net w or k s. See t he Caut i on on page 4- 2.
I MN- 903003- E07 June 2008 4- 19
TRuepoi nt

5000 & 4040 Oper at or I nt er f ace


Cr eat e a new Fl ash Car d
1. Click on the ... button and select the appropriate Upgrade Pack file. This will be a
.zip file. See Figure 4- 19. Once you have done this, the type of radio and software
version number will appear.
2. Insert a flash card into your card reader and select the appropriate drive using the
Removable Disk scroll buttons under Target Card. If the card is empty, only the
card capacity will appear. If the card contains TRuepoint software, the radio type
information and Primary and Alternate bank software versions will appear. If the
card has configuration data, the Configuration File version will appear.
3. Once you have an Upgrade Pack and a Target Card selected, the Only Create
button will be active. Press this button to create a new flash card.
4. The flash card you specified will be formatted and the data from the upgrade pack
will be transferred to the Primary and Alternate banks. You can stop this process at
any time by selecting the Abort button. If you Abort, the data on the flash card will
be corrupted.
5. After the upgrade process is finished, a new window will appear asking you to eject
the flash card from the reader.
Tr ansf er r i ng Conf i gur at i on Dat a
1. Insert the flash card with the configuration data you want to transfer into your card
reader and select the appropriate drive using the Removable Disk scroll buttons
under Source Card. The Primary and Alternate bank software versions and the
Configuration File version will appear.
2. Insert the target flash card into a second card reader and select the appropriate
drive using the Removable Disk scroll buttons under Target Card. If the card
contains TRuepoint software, the radio type information and Primary and
Alternate bank software versions will appear. If the card has configuration data, the
Configuration File version will appear.
3. Once both cards are selected, and the Target card has valid software, the Only
Transfer button will be available. Press this button to transfer the configuration
data from the source flash card to the target flash card.
4. After the transfer process is finished, a new window will appear asking you to eject
the flash card from the reader. If you keep the card in the reader, the CTU will
automatically update information about the data on the Target Card.
4- 20 Har r i s St r at ex Net w or k s
Chapt er 4. Upgr ades
Figure 4-20. Transferring Dat a
Usi ng t he same car d r eader f or Sour ce and Tar get Car ds
1. If you want to use the same card reader for the Source and Target cards, select the
same Removable Disk letter for both. The Source card should be in the slot before
you start the process.
2. Once the process has started and the CTU has read the configuration data from the
source card, you will be asked to remove it from the card reader and insert the
Target card.
3. After the transfer process is finished, a new window will appear asking you to eject
the flash card from the reader.
I MN- 903003- E07 June 2008 4- 21
TRuepoi nt

5000 & 4040 Oper at or I nt er f ace


Cr eat i ng & Tr ansf er r i ng at t he same t i me
1. If you want to create a new flash card and transfer configuration data at the same
time, you must have an Upgrade Pack selected as well as Source and Target cards
selected. Once these are selected, the Create/ Transfer button will be available.
See Figure 4- 21.
Figure 4-21. Creat e/ Transfer
2. Press the Create/ Transfer button to start the process. The CTU will format the
flash card you specified, transfer the data from the upgrade pack to the primary and
alternate banks, and then transfer the configuration data from the source card to
the target card. Any previous data on the target card will be lost.
3. You can stop the process at any time by pressing Abort. If you do so, data on the
Target card will be corrupted. After the transfer process is finished, a new window
will appear asking you to eject the flash card from the reader.
4- 22 Har r i s St r at ex Net w or k s
Chapt er 4. Upgr ades
I MN- 903003- E07 June 2008 5- 1
Chapt er 5. Tr oubl eshoot i ng
LEDs
Table 5-1. I ndicat or Light Display Descript ion
Modul e Label Col or Meani ng
MODEM TRAFFI C Green The module is on- line ( see Not e below)
Off No t raffic passing
RFU Green The RFU is operat ing properly
Red The RFU has failed ( Refer t o Manual
I MN- 903001- Exx)
CABLE Green The cable connect ing t he I DU t o t he RFU is
working properly
Red The cable connect ing t he SPU t o t he RFU
has failed.
MODEM Green The modem is operat ing properly
Red The modem has failed
MUX TRAFFI C Green The module is on- line
Off No t raffic passing
MUX Green The MUX is operat ing properly
Red The MUX has failed
Cont roller RMT Off The remot e sit e is operat ing properly
Yellow The remot e sit e is in alarm
MI N Off The Syst em is operat ing properly
Yellow Traffic has been manually forced t o one of
t he t wo channels, or ot her minor alarms
MAJ Green The Syst em is operat ing properly
Red Maj or Alarm; t raffic- affect ing problem
( out age)
5- 2 Har r i s St r at ex Net w or k s
Chapt er 5. Tr oubl eshoot i ng
I n a prot ect ed syst em, t he receive prot ect ion swit ching is t ypically
achieved t hrough t he RFU receive Decoder swit ch ( Modem B) and t he
receive DADE demux swit ch ( Modem A) . For t his reason, Traffic LEDs
on bot h Modems will be lit and pat h STATUS > ONLI NE EQUI PMENT will
display ONLI NE for bot h MDM A RX and MDM B RX.
Mi x ed Mode MUX
The following table describes the behavior of the different mixed mode Muxes when
you have a protected system and only one modem is powered up. This information is
provided to clear up any confusion over how the different mixed mode Muxes operate.
Loopback Test i ng
The following loopback tests can be performed through the HHT or Web- CI T.
Modem IF loopback (local only)
High level Mux loopback
Tributary or STM1/ OC3 Input or Radio loopback
Wayside Input or Radio loopback
Type of Mux Modem A on Modem B on
Mixed Mode Mux on Side A & B Online Mux is on;
Offline Mux is off
Online Mux is on;
Offline Mux is off
Dual Mode Mixed Mode Mux on
Side A & B
Bot h Muxes are on Bot h Muxes are on
Mixed Mode Mux on Side A &
Dual Mixed Mode Mux on Side B
Provides power t o Mux
B
Does not provide
power t o Mux A
Dual Mixed Mode Mux on Side A
& Mixed Mode Mux on Side B
Does not provide
power t o Mux B
Provides power t o Mux
A
I MN- 903003- E07 June 2008 5- 3
TRuepoi nt

5000 & 4040 Oper at or I nt er f ace


Modem I F Loopback Test
From the Web- CI T, select ADMI NI STRATI ON > LOOPBACK. Select the appropriate
loopback from the drop-down menu.
From the HHT, select CONTROL > LOOPBACK > HI GH LVL LPBK > MDM I F
LPBK.
Figure 5-1. Modem I F loopback t est
The t raffic on a 10/ 100BASE-T t ribut ary may not be looped back when
t he high level loopback is set .
Hi gh Lev el Mux Local Loopback Test
From the Web- CI T, select ADMI NI STRATI ON > LOOPBACK. Select the appropriate
loopback from the drop-down menu.
From the HHT, select CONTROL > LOOPBACK > HI GH LVL LPBK > MUX LPBK.
Figure 5-2. High Level MUX local loopback t est
The t raffic on a 10/ 100BASE-T t ribut ary may not be looped back when
t he high level loopback is set .
Tr i but ar y or STM1/ OC3 Loopback Test s
Local Tr i but ar y or STM1/ OC3 I nput Loopback
From the Web- CI T, select ADMI NI STRATI ON > LOOPBACK. Select the appropriate
loopback from the drop-down menu.
From the HHT, if you have DS1/ DS3 or E1, select CONTROL > LOOPBACK > LOCAL
LPBK > TRI B N LOC LPBK. If you have STM1/ OC3, select CONTROL > LOOPBACK
> LOCAL LPBK > MUX LOC LPBK. Then select I NPUT under new value for either.
MUX
TX
RX
ACU Modem
TX
RX
ACU Modem MUX
5- 4 Har r i s St r at ex Net w or k s
Chapt er 5. Tr oubl eshoot i ng
Figure 5-3. Local Tr ibut ary or STM1/ OC3 I nput Loopback
Local Tr i but ar y or STM1/ OC3 Radi o Loopback
From the Web- CI T, select ADMI NI STRATI ON > LOOPBACK. Select the appropriate
loopback from the drop-down menu.
From the HHT, if you have DS1/ DS3 or E1, select CONTROL > LOOPBACK > LOCAL
LPBK > TRI B N LOC LPBK. If you have STM1/ OC3, select CONTROL > LOOPBACK
> LOCAL LPBK > MUX LOC LPBK. Then select RADI O under new value for either.
Figure 5-4. Local Tr ibut ary or STM1/ OC3 Radio Loopback
Remot e Tr i but ar y or STM1/ OC3 Radi o Loopback
From the Web- CI T, select ADMI NI STRATI ON > LOOPBACK. Select the appropriate
loopback from the drop-down menu.
From the HHT, if you have DS1/ DS3 or E1, select CONTROL > LOOPBACK > RMT
RADI O LPBK > TRI B N RMT LPBK. If you have STM1/ OC3, select CONTROL >
LOOPBACK > RMT RADI O LPBK > MUX RMT LPBK.
MUX
RX
TX
ACU Modem
MUX
TX
RX
ACU Modem
MUX
RX
TX
ACU Modem
MUX
TX
RX
ACU Modem
I MN- 903003- E07 June 2008 5- 5
TRuepoi nt

5000 & 4040 Oper at or I nt er f ace


Figure 5-5. Remot e Tribut ary or STM1/ OC3 I nput Loopback
Way si de Loopback Test s
Local Way si de I nput Loopback
From the Web- CI T, select ADMI NI STRATI ON > LOOPBACK. Select the appropriate
loopback from the drop-down menu.
From the HHT, select CONTROL > LOOPBACK > WS 1 LPBK > LOCAL LPBK.
Then select I NPUT under new value.
Figure 5-6. Local Wayside I nput Loopback
Local Way si de Radi o Loopback
From the Web- CI T, select ADMI NI STRATI ON > LOOPBACK. Select the appropriate
loopback from the drop-down menu.
From the HHT, select CONTROL > LOOPBACK > WS 1 LPBK > LOCAL LPBK.
Then select RADI O under new value.
MUX
RX
TX
ACU Modem
MUX
TX
RX
ACU Modem
Local Site
Remote Site
TX
RX
ACU Modem
MUX
MUX
Wayside
TX
RX
ACU Modem
Wayside
MUX
MUX
5- 6 Har r i s St r at ex Net w or k s
Chapt er 5. Tr oubl eshoot i ng
Figure 5-7. Local Wayside Radio Loopback
Remot e Waysi de Radi o Loopback
From the Web- CI T, select ADMI NI STRATI ON > LOOPBACK. Select the appropriate
loopback from the drop-down menu.
From the HHT, select CONTROL > LOOPBACK > WS 1 LPBK > RMT LPBK.
Figure 5-8. Remot e Wayside Radio Loopback
TX
RX
ACU Modem
Wayside
MUX
MUX
TX
RX
ACU Modem
MUX
MUX
Wayside
TX
RX
ACU Modem
MUX
MUX
Wayside
TX
RX
ACU Modem
Wayside
MUX
MUX
I MN- 903003- E07 June 2008 5- 7
TRuepoi nt

5000 & 4040 Oper at or I nt er f ace


Per f or mance
BER Test i ng
The BER value is measured over the duration of the system BER Performance
Measurement test. To run this test, go to PERFORMANCE in the Web- CI T or
PERFORMANCE > SYS BER > MEASUREMENT in the HHT. When the BER
measurement is set to STOP, the BER elapsed time counter will not count and N
parity

will not be cumulated. Any BER value accumulated before the BER measurement was
stopped will remain available. When the BER measurement is set to RUN, the BER
statistic will be reset, the BER elapsed counter will start incrementing once a second,
and the BER will be calculated.
Et her net St at i st i cs
Ethernet Statistics are provided for ethernet connections; five parameters are provided
for each bridge. To view the Ethernet Statistics, go to PERFORMANCE > ETHERNET
STATI STI CS in the Web- CI T or PERFORMANCE > ETH STATS in the HHT.
Ethernet Statistics are supported per BRIDGE-MIB.
Figure 5-9. Et hernet St at ist ics Example
Event Log Vi ew er
The Event Log Viewer is launched from the Web-CIT. Go to ADMI NI STRATI ON >
EVENT LOG VI EWER. The Event Log Viewer will pop up as a new window (if you have
pop-ups disabled in your internet browser, make sure you enable them).
5- 8 Har r i s St r at ex Net w or k s
Chapt er 5. Tr oubl eshoot i ng
Figure 5-10. Event Log Viewer
The following key events that occur on the radio are captured in Event Log Viewer:
Security events (for example, attempted logins)
Trace events (for example, a configuration change)
Alarm events (for example, the setting or clearing of an alarm)
Events can then be filtered and/ or sorted for further diagnosis. To sort events, click on
the top of the column you want to sort by to sort the list in ascending or descending
order. To filter, click on the filter choices on the left-hand side of the screen and select
your filter options. In the example shown in Figure 5- 11, the total list of events (1000)
has been filtered down to 9 events by selecting Ala r m s > Act ive and MUXA. Once
Apply has been entered, a list returns of only the events that are the type ALM and the
component MUXA.
I MN- 903003- E07 June 2008 5- 9
TRuepoi nt

5000 & 4040 Oper at or I nt er f ace


Figure 5-11. Filt ered Hist ory Event s
Clicking on the SAVE button will save the whole list as a comma delimited text file
which can then be opened and manipulated in Microsoft Excel.
For more information on Alarms recorded in the Event Log Viewer, please refer to the
Glossar y of Alarms on page 5- 14.
Event Log Viewer will hold up to 3000 events at a time. Each event is numbered
sequentially and goes from 1 to 99,999. When the radio reaches event number 3000,
the next event that comes in will be numbered 3001 and event number 1 will no longer
appear in the log. This pattern will continue until the number of events reaches 99,999
at which point the numbering will restart at 1.
You can configure the radio to auto-dump the events once you have reached the
threshold to up to three external FTP servers. Every time you do a new auto-dump, the
new information will be appended to the existing file.
Go to CONFI GURATI ON > EVENTLOG BACKUP to set up the FTP servers.
5- 10 Har r i s St r at ex Net w or k s
Chapt er 5. Tr oubl eshoot i ng
Figure 5-12. Event Log Backup
I MN- 903003- E07 June 2008 5- 11
TRuepoi nt

5000 & 4040 Oper at or I nt er f ace


Lock s & Sw i t ches
In a protected system, the operator has the ability to lock or switch traffic to a selected
side which can be useful for isolating problems.
A lock switches traffic to a selected side and locks it there regardless of the alarm
condition. There are four lock controls:
Lock TX Out
Lock TX MUX
Lock RxRFU/ Decoder
Lock RxDADE/ Demux
A switch switches traffic only if it is safe to do so (no alarms are present). Traffic is not
locked on a selected side and switching is allowed. Traffic will switch back
automatically if any problem occurs. There are four manual switch controls:
Switch TX Modem/ RF
Switch TX MUX
Switch RxRFU/ Decoder
Switch RxDADE/ Demux
Rel ay s & Ex t er nal Al ar ms
The SPU controller provides four relay contacts. In addition, an Orderwire card or an
AlarmRelay card can be placed in the option slots. The optional AlarmRelay card
provides either 6 or 12 additional relay contacts. These relays can be programmed to
indicate an alarm status or to control local site equipment.
These relay outputs are available: RFU ALARM, SPU ALARM, OPT 1 OW RI NG
1
,
OPT 2 OW RI NG, DEMUX A/ B SYNC LOSS, RSL A/ B LOW, RA A/ B SI G
DEGRAD, MUX A/ B ERR SEC ALM, BER A/ B ALARM, TX A/ B PWR ALM, TX A/
B PWR EXCEED, MDM A/ B ONLI NE, SYS MUX A/ B ONLI NE, MUX A/ B TX
ONLI NE, MDM A/ B TX ONLI NE, MDM A/ B RX ONLI NE, MUX A/ B RX ONLI NE,
MANU CTL, MAJOR ALARM, MI NOR ALARM, CONTROL ACTI VE, MUX I NPUT
LOS, and CABLE ALARM.
The SPU controller also provides two digital inputs for local site alarm monitoring.
These alarms are reported in the Web- CI T or HHT the same way that the radio alarms
are reported. The optional AlarmRelay card provides either 12 or 30 digital inputs.
1
I f you assign OPT 1 OW RI NG as an alarm relay, t his alarm will appear when t he phone set at t he sit e is ringing.
Please not e t hat t his alarm does not mean a hardware failure, but indicat es t hat t he t echnicians at t ent ion t o t he
ringing phone is request ed.
5- 12 Har r i s St r at ex Net w or k s
Chapt er 5. Tr oubl eshoot i ng
If you have an AlarmRelay card, go to CONFI GURATI ON > ALARM TUNE to define
which digital input condition will be reported as an alarm. The choices are OPEN or
GND(grounded); GND is the default. When GND is selected, the digital input will
report an alarm when it is grounded but no alarm will be reported when it is open.
When OPEN is selected, the digital input will report an alarm until it is open.
Figure 5-13. Alarm Tune
HHT: CONFI GURATI ON > EXTERNAL ALARMS
I MN- 903003- E07 June 2008 5- 13
TRuepoi nt

5000 & 4040 Oper at or I nt er f ace


I f y ou have a V1 Cont r ol l er , and y ou do a sof t - boot ( r e- i nser t i ng
t he cont r ol l er or sel ect i ng Sof t w ar e r eboot i n t he Web- CI T) , t he
r el ay s w i l l go i nt o al ar m f or a f ew seconds bef or e r et ur ni ng t o
t hei r i ni t i al condi t i on.
Tr ap Cust omi zat i on
The following SNMP traps are available: ETHERNET ADDR, LOAD CORRUPTED,
SPI COMM ALM, MODEM CABLE, REBOOT ALM, SI GNAL DEGRADED, RFU
COMM, FLASH FI LE SYS, CONFI G FI LE, I NVALI D SK, ATPC FAI L, EXTERNAL
ALM, ALI GN ALM, BER ALM, RSL RFU, I NPUT LOS, OUT_FAI L ALM, CODE
ERROR, I NPUT AI S, LOCK, I NPUT LPBK, RADI O LPBK, HI GH LPBK, RFU
MUTE, CW TONE, CARD MI SMATCH, CARD ABSENT, CARD DWNLD, CARD
FAI L, UNKNOWN_CARD, NOT SUPPORT SI MPLEX, FW NOT UPGRADED,
CARD SETTI NG, REPLACE ME, REMOTE RADI O LPBK, MDM TX SYNTH, SYNC
LOSS, I NPUT OOF, MUX I NP DEGR, ETH LI NK TEST, MUX AI S I NSERT, RFU
TX EQ, RFU RX EQ, SI LENT FAI L, CE TUN. CONFLI CT, CE TUN. COM FAI L,
RFU PA LOW, RFU PA RANGE, RFU EEPROM, RFU SYNTH, RMT LPBK REQ,
CLBR TBL MI SMATCH, TX CLOCK I NPUT LOSS, WRONG CONFI G, RDI
ALARM, TI MI NG RF, TI MI NG I NPUT, TI MI NG SPUR, TI MI NG PDH, TI MI NG
EXT1, TI MI NG EXT2, EVENT LOG, RADI US ACCESS FAI L, SNMP AUTH FAI L,
LOGI N ATK ALM, SVC CHAN COMM FAI L, LI NKI D MI SMATCH, MDM BATT
ALM, MUXB NOT ALLOWED, SDM NOT ALLOWED, XCON MI SMATCH, BKPN
MI SMATCH, SPUR I NP LPBK, SPUR RAD LPBK.
Web- CI T
If the pages in the Web-CIT do not look correct, or pages are partially loaded only, you
should clear your internet cache and reboot.
You also may need to clear your internet cache after a software upgrade.
5- 14 Har r i s St r at ex Net w or k s
Chapt er 5. Tr oubl eshoot i ng
Gl ossar y of Al ar ms
Message Ex pl anat i on Act i on
MAJOR ALARM I ndicat es t he presence of a maj or
alarm on t he syst em.
Check t he alarms on t he local NE.
MI NOR ALARM I ndicat es t he presence of a minor
alarm on t he syst em.
Check t he alarms on t he local NE.
REMOTE ALARM I ndicat es t he presence of an alarm
on t he remot e sit e.
Check t he alarms on t he remot e
NE.
CARD ABSENT MENU
MDM A ABSENT I ndicat es t hat a modem is not
insert ed and powered in t he MDM A
slot .
Put t he missing modem in t he
shelf.
MDM B ABSENT I ndicat es t hat a modem is not
insert ed and powered in t he MDM B
slot .
Put t he missing modem in t he shelf
or modify t he syst em prot ect ion
configurat ion.
MUX A ABSENT I ndicat es t hat a module is not
insert ed and powered in t he MUX A
slot .
Put t he missing MUX in t he shelf.
MUX B ABSENT I ndicat es t hat a module is not
insert ed and powered in t he MUX B
slot .
Put t he missing MUX in t he shelf or
modify t he MUX prot ect ion
configurat ion.
OPT 1 ABSENT I ndicat es t hat a module is not
insert ed and powered in t he OPT 1
slot .
Put t he missing opt ional card in t he
shelf or modify t he opt ion card
configurat ion.
OPT 2 ABSENT I ndicat es t hat a module is not
insert ed and powered in t he OPT 2
slot .
Put t he missing opt ional card in t he
shelf or modify t he opt ion card
configurat ion.
RFU A ABSENT The RFU is not responding t o t he
cont roller card.
Check for t he presence of an
inst alled RFU. I f it is inst alled,
check t he cable alarm LED. I f t he
I F cable is correct , reboot t he
cont roller. I f t his does not fix t he
problem, t urn t he modem off, wait
a few seconds, and t hen t urn t he
modem on again. I f t his does not
work, replace t he cont roller,
modem, RFU, or SPU shelf.
RFU B ABSENT The RFU is not responding t o t he
cont roller card.
See RFU A ABSENT.
SDM ABSENT I ndicat es t hat a module is not
insert ed and powered in t he SDM
slot .
I nsert t he SDM card or change t he
MUX prot ect ion or t ribut ary
configurat ion if applicable.
I MN- 903003- E07 June 2008 5- 15
TRuepoi nt

5000 & 4040 Oper at or I nt er f ace


CONTROL ACTI VE MENU
155MB LOCAL I NPUT
LOOPBACK
OC- 3/ STS- 3 input loopback is set . Clear t he loopback cont rol.
155MB LOCAL RADI O
LOOPBACK
OC- 3/ STS- 3 radio loopback is set . Clear t he loopback cont rol.
155 MB REMOTE
RADI O LOOPBACK
OC- 3/ STS- 3 remot e radio loopback
is set .
Clear t he loopback cont rol.
155 MB REMOTE
RADI O LOOPBACK
REQUEST
The request for an OC- 3/ STS- 3
remot e radio loopback is received
from t he remot e sit e.
Clear t he loopback cont rol.
LOCK RX DADE
DEMUX A
Rx Modem DADE and Demux is
manually swit ched and locked on
side A.
LOCK RX DADE
DEMUX B
Rx Modem DADE and Demux is
manually swit ched and locked on
side B.
LOCK RX RFU
DECODER A
Rx RFU and Modem Decoder is
manually swit ched and locked on
side A.
LOCK RX RFU
DECODER B
Rx RFU and Modem Decoder is
manually swit ched and locked on
side B.
MODEM I F
LOOPBACK
Modem I F loopback is set . Clear t he loopback cont rol.
MUX HI GH LEVEL
LOOPBACK
Mux High level loopback is set . Clear t he loopback cont rol.
RFU A MUTED RFU A is manually mut ed.
RFU B MUTED RFU B is manually mut ed.
TRI B DS3 X LOCAL
I NPUT LOOPBACK
DS3 Tribut ary x input loopback is
set .
Clear t he loopback cont rol.
TRI B DS3 X LOCAL
RADI O LOOPBACK
DS3 Tribut ary x radio loopback is
set .
Clear t he loopback cont rol.
TRI B DS3 X REMOTE
RADI O LOOPBACK
DS3 Tribut ary x remot e radio
loopback is set .
Clear t he loopback cont rol.
TRI B DS3 X REMOTE
RADI O LOOPBACK
REQUEST
The request for a DS3 Tribut ary x
remot e radio loopback is received
from t he remot e sit e.
Clear t he loopback cont rol.
TRI B X LOCAL I NPUT
LOOPBACK
DS1/ E1 Tribut ary x input loopback
is set .
Clear t he loopback cont rol.
TRI B X LOCAL RADI O
LOOPBACK
DS1/ E1 Tribut ary x radio loopback
is set .
Clear t he loopback cont rol.
Message Ex pl anat i on Act i on
5- 16 Har r i s St r at ex Net w or k s
Chapt er 5. Tr oubl eshoot i ng
TRI B X REMOTE
RADI O LOOPBACK
DS1/ E1 Tribut ary x remot e radio
loopback is set .
Clear t he loopback cont rol.
TRI B X REMOTE
RADI O LOOPBACK
REQUEST
The request for a DS1/ E1 Tribut ary
x remot e radio loopback is received
from t he remot e sit e.
Clear t he loopback cont rol.
TX A CW TONE CW- t one mode is set on Tx A.
TX B CW TONE CW- t one mode is set on Tx B.
TX A LOCK Transmit t er is manually swit ched
and locked on side A.
TX B LOCK Transmit t er is manually swit ched
and locked on side B.
WAYSI DE Y LOCAL
I NPUT LOOPBACK
Wayside y input loopback is set . Clear t he loopback cont rol.
WAYSI DE Y LOCAL
RADI O LOOPBACK
Wayside y radio loopback is set . Clear t he loopback cont rol.
WAYSI DE Y REMOTE
RADI O LOOPBACK
Wayside y remot e radio loopback is
set .
Clear t he loopback cont rol.
WAYSI DE Y REMOTE
RADI O LOOPBACK
REQUEST
The request for a Wayside y remot e
radio loopback is received from t he
remot e sit e.
Clear t he loopback cont rol.
EXTERNAL ALARMS MENU
CONTROLLER
EXTERNAL I NPUT 1
Report s an alarm on t he ext ernal
input s of t he cont roller card. This
st ring is configurable.
Check t he equipment report ing an
alarm.
CONTROLLER
EXTERNAL I NPUT 2
Report s an alarm on t he ext ernal
input s of t he cont roller card. This
st ring is configurable.
Check t he equipment report ing an
alarm.
OPTI ONAL 1
EXTERNAL I NPUT
Report s an alarm on t he ext ernal
input s of Opt ion Card 1.
Check t he equipment report ing an
alarm.
OPTI ONAL 2
EXTERNAL I NPUT
Report s an alarm on t he ext ernal
input s of Opt ion Card 2.
Check t he equipment report ing an
alarm.
MODEM A, B MENU
MDM A/ B BATTERY The bat t ery in t he Modem has died
or is not funct ioning.
Check t he modem and replace if
necessary.
MDM A FPGA
DOWNLOAD
There is a firmware init ializat ion
failure on MDM A.
Updat e t he firmware wit h t he
lat est version. I f t he problem
persist s, replace t he card.
MDM B FPGA
DOWNLOAD
There is a firmware init ializat ion
failure on MDM B.
Updat e t he firmware wit h t he
lat est version. I f t he problem
persist s, replace t he card.
MDM A/ MDM B FPGA
SETTI NG
The cont roller failed t o find or
download t he modem paramet ers.
Download t he lat est soft ware
version.
Message Ex pl anat i on Act i on
I MN- 903003- E07 June 2008 5- 17
TRuepoi nt

5000 & 4040 Oper at or I nt er f ace


MDM A NOT
UPGRADED
MDM A is current ly running
firmware t hat is different t han what
is in t he SPUs act ive soft ware
bank.
Upgrade t he firmware of t he card.
MDM B NOT
UPGRADED
MDM B is current ly running
firmware t hat is different t han what
is in t he SPUs act ive soft ware
bank.
Upgrade t he firmware of t he card.
MDM A/ MDM B
REPLACE ME
Modem equipment failure. Replace t he modem.
MDM A/ MDM B
SYNTHESI ZER
The modem Tx synt hesizer is
unlocked.
This alarm may cause a t emporary
loss of t raffic. I f t he problem
occurs frequent ly, replace t he
modem.
MDM A/ MDM B
UNKNOWN
The soft ware does not support t he
modem model in slot A.
Upgrade t he soft ware wit h t he
lat est version.
MDM A/ MDM B
WRONG OPTI ON
The modem does not support t he
current ly configured bandwidt h.
Replace t he modem wit h a
wideband modem or change t he
syst em configurat ion t o use a
smaller bandwidt h.
MUX A, B MENU
I NTERM LVL TX OOF There is a framing loss of an
int ermediat e signal in t he
mult iplexed signal of a t ribut ary
from t he user equipment .
MUX A FPGA
DOWNLOAD
There is a firmware init ializat ion
failure on MUX A.
Updat e t he firmware wit h t he
lat est version. I f t he problem
persist s, replace t he card.
MUX B FPGA
DOWNLOAD
There is a firmware init ializat ion
failure on MUX B.
Updat e t he firmware wit h t he
lat est version. I f t he problem
persist s, replace t he card.
MUX A/ MUX B FPGA
SETTI NG
The cont roller failed t o find or
download t he MUX paramet ers.
Download t he lat est soft ware
version.
MUX A/ MUX B
I NTERM LVL RX OOF
There is a framing loss of an
int ermediat e signal in t he
mult iplexed signal from t he air
int erface
MUX A NOT
UPGRADED
MUX A is current ly running
firmware t hat is different t han what
is in t he SPUs act ive soft ware
bank.
Upgrade t he firmware of t he card.
MUX B NOT
UPGRADED
MUX B is current ly running
firmware t hat is different t han what
is in t he SPUs act ive soft ware
bank.
Upgrade t he firmware of t he card.
Message Ex pl anat i on Act i on
5- 18 Har r i s St r at ex Net w or k s
Chapt er 5. Tr oubl eshoot i ng
MUX A/ MUX B
REPLACE ME
MUX equipment failure. Replace t he MUX.
MUX A/ MUX B TX
CLOCK I NPUT LOSS
No ext ernal clock input from t he
cust omer.
MUX A/ MUX B
UNKNOWN
The soft ware does not support t he
model of t he MUX.
Upgrade t he soft ware wit h t he
lat est version.
RDI I N ALM OC- 3/ STS3 or DS1/ E1 t ribut ary x
or DS3 t ribut ary x or Wayside y:
remot e defect indicat ion. AI S from
t he SPU received from t he
cust omer.
I f t here is no Rx pat h problem and
t here is no MUX Replace Me LED
alarm, check t he connect ion
bet ween t he user equipment and
t he SPU.
RX OUTPUT FAI LED DS1/ E1 t ribut ary x or DS3 t ribut ary
x or Wayside y: out put t o t he
cust omer failed.
Check t he MUX Replace Me LED. I f
t he MUX is okay, check t he user
equipment or t he connect ion.
TX I NPUT AI S OC- 3/ STS3 or DS1/ E1 t ribut ary x
or DS3 t ribut ary x or Wayside y:
AI S input received from t he
cust omer.
Check t he MUX Replace Me LED. I f
t he MUX is okay, check t he user
equipment .
TX I NPUT CODE
ERROR
DS1/ E1 t ribut ary x or DS3 t ribut ary
x or Wayside y: code errors or
bipolar violat ions on t he t ribut ary.
Check t he MUX Replace Me LED. I f
t he MUX is okay, check t he user
equipment or t he connect ion.
TX I NPUT DEGRADED OC- 3/ STS- 3: I ndicat es a BER
higher t han 10E- 6 on t he t ribut ary.
Check t he connect ion bet ween t he
user equipment and t he SPM.
TX I NPUT LOS OC- 3/ STS- 3 or DS1/ E1 t ribut ary x
or DS3 t ribut ary x or Wayside y: No
input signal from t he cust omer.
Check t he MUX Replace Me LED. I f
t he MUX is okay, check t he user
equipment or t he connect ion.
TX I NPUT OOF
DS3 t ribut ary y: No DS3 frame in
input dat a from cust omer.
Check t he MUX Replace Me LED. I f
t he MUX is okay, check t he user
equipment or t he connect ion.
OPT 1,2 MENU
OPT 1/ OPT 2 10BT
COMM
Loss of communicat ion bet ween
bot h ends of t he Et hernet over
64kbit s/ s t unnel.
Check for t he presence and
configurat ion of t he et hernet over
64kbit / s cards at bot h ends of t he
t unnel. I f t he cards and t he
configurat ion are correct , check for
loss of communicat ion bet ween
bot h NEs. I f communicat ion is
okay, it is also possible t hat t he
pat h of t he 64kbit s/ s t unnel
t raverses a NE t hat does not have
enough resources t o carry t he dat a
in t he t unnel. I f t his is t he case,
consider a change in t he net work
t opology.
Message Ex pl anat i on Act i on
I MN- 903003- E07 June 2008 5- 19
TRuepoi nt

5000 & 4040 Oper at or I nt er f ace


OPT 1 FPGA
DOWNLOAD
There is a firmware init ializat ion
failure on Opt ional Card 1.
Updat e t he firmware wit h t he
lat est version. I f t he problem
persist s, replace t he card.
OPT 2 FPGA
DOWNLOAD
There is a firmware init ializat ion
failure on Opt ional Card 2.
Updat e t he firmware wit h t he
lat est version. I f t he problem
persist s, replace t he card.
OPT 1/ OPT 2 FPGA
SETTI NG
The cont roller failed t o find or
download t he opt ional card
paramet ers.
Download t he lat est soft ware
version.
OPT 1/ OPT 2 NOT
SUPPORTED I N
SI MPLEX
The opt ional card is not support ed
in t he current net work
configurat ion.
Configure t he syst em in duplex
mode or connect syst em t o
anot her NE t hrough a local link.
OPT 1 NOT
UPGRADED
OPT 1 is current ly running firmware
t hat is different t han what is in t he
SPUs act ive soft ware bank.
Upgrade t he firmware of t he card.
OPT 2 NOT
UPGRADED
OPT 2 is current ly running firmware
t hat is different t han what is in t he
SPUs act ive soft ware bank.
Upgrade t he firmware of t he card.
OPT 1/ OPT 2
REPLACE ME
The opt ional card failed. Replace t he opt ional card.
OPT 1/ OPT 2
UNKNOWN
The soft ware does not support t he
model of t he opt ional card.
Upgrade t he soft ware wit h t he
lat est version.
PATH MENU
ALI GNMENT The difference bet ween pat h A and
pat h B in space diversit y is t oo
large.
Reduce t he space bet ween t he
ant ennas so t he difference
bet ween t he ant enna t o SPU on
side A and t he ant enna t o SPU on
side B is less t han 75m.
DEMUX A SYNC LOSS Sync loss due t o a pat h problem. This is a t emporary problem due t o
air condit ions. I f t he problem
persist s, check for t he out put
power on t he remot e sit e or
ant enna alignment .
DEMUX A WAYSI DE
SYNC LOSS
Sync loss due t o a pat h problem
affect ing only t he wayside.
The wayside may be more
sensit ive t o sync losses t han t he
main t ribut ary. This is a t emporary
problem. I f it persist s, consider
revising t he out put power of t he
remot e sit e.
DEMUX B SYNC LOSS Sync loss due t o a pat h problem. See DEMUX A SYNC LOSS
DEMUX B WAYSI DE
SYNC LOSS
Sync loss due t o a pat h problem
affect ing only t he wayside.
See DEMUX A WAYSI DE SYNC
LOSS
Message Ex pl anat i on Act i on
5- 20 Har r i s St r at ex Net w or k s
Chapt er 5. Tr oubl eshoot i ng
MUX RMT LOF The remot e sit e report s a sync loss
from t he local sit e.
This may be caused by a pat h
problem t owards t he remot e sit e.
I f t he problem persist s, check for a
local t ransmit t er failure, a remot e
receiver equipment failure or
ant enna alignment .
REMOTE SYNC LOSS The Rx remot e online demux
cannot synchronize on main t raffic.
See DEMUX A SYNC LOSS
RSL A LOW The RSL of RFU A is below t he
syst em t hreshold.
This is a t emporary pat h problem
due t o air condit ion. I f t he problem
persist s, check for t he out put
power on t he remot e sit e or
ant enna alignment .
RSL B LOW The RSL of RFU B is below t he
syst em t hreshold.
See RSL A LOW
SI GNAL DEGRADED
A
The signal qualit y on side A is
degrading.
I ndicat es a pat h problem. Check
for a RSL alarm. I f t his alarm
persist s check for ant enna
alignment or for t he RFU Replace
Me LED, t he modem Replace Me
LED, or a modem cable alarm.
SI GNAL DEGRADED
B
The signal qualit y on side B is
degrading.
See SI GNAL DEGRADED A
RFU A, B MENU
RFU A/ RFU B
CALI BRATI ON TABLE
MI SMATCH
At least one of t he modules ( I F/
RPC, Tx, Rx) has a wrong version
of t he calibrat ion t able.
RFU A/ RFU B
EEPROM
The RFUs EEPROM is not
funct ional.
Replace t he RFU.
RFU A/ RFU B FAI LED The RFU init ializat ion failed. Upgrade t he RFU wit h t he lat est
soft ware. I f t he problem persist s,
replace t he RFU.
RFU A/ RFU B
FREQUENCY
CONFI GURATI ON
The TX or RX frequency is incorrect . Check t he TX and RX frequencies.
RFU A/ RFU B MUTE
FOR TELEMETRY
The RFU is mut ing because it
cannot communicat e wit h t he
inst alled cont roller.
Check first for t he modem cable
alarm LED. I f t he I F cable is
correct , t hen reboot t he cont roller.
I f t his does not solve t he problem,
t urn t he modem off, wait a few
seconds, and t hen t urn t he modem
on again. I f t he problem is st ill not
solved, t ry replacing t he cont roller,
t he modem, t he RFU or finally, t he
SPU shelf.
Message Ex pl anat i on Act i on
I MN- 903003- E07 June 2008 5- 21
TRuepoi nt

5000 & 4040 Oper at or I nt er f ace


RFU A NOT
UPGRADED
RFU A is current ly running soft ware
t hat is different t han what is in t he
SPUs act ive soft ware bank.
Upgrade t he RFU soft ware.
RFU B NOT
UPGRADED
RFU B is current ly running soft ware
t hat is different t han what is in t he
SPUs act ive soft ware bank.
Upgrade t he RFU soft ware.
RFU A/ RFU B PA LOW The PA out put is low ( more t han 3
dB below t he set value) .
RFU A/ RFU B PA
OUTPUT OUT OF
RANGE
The PA out put power is out of
range. When t his occurs, an Out of
Range value will appear in t he
OUTPUT POWER menu.
RFU A/ RFU B
REPLACE ME
There is a RFU equipment failure. Replace t he RFU.
RFU A/ RFU B RX
EQUI PMENT
There is a RFU equipment failure in
t he Rx direct ion.
Replace t he appropriat e RFU.
RFU A/ RFU B
SETTI NG
The cont roller failed t o find or
download t he RFU paramet ers.
Download t he lat est soft ware
version.
RFU A/ RFU B
SOFTWARE
DOWNLOAD
The RFU soft ware is corrupt ed. This alarm should disappear by
it self aft er a few moment s. I f t he
alarm persist s, upgrade t he
syst em wit h t he lat est soft ware
version.
RFU A/ RFU B
SYNTHESI ZER
I ndicat es a hardware failure of a
synt hesizer on t he RFU.
Replace t he RFU.
RFU A/ RFU B TX
EQUI PMENT
There is a RFU equipment failure in
t he Tx direct ion.
Replace t he appropriat e RFU.
RFU A/ RFU B TX
SI LENT FAI LURE
I ndicat es a silent failure of t he PA of
t he RFU.
Replace t he RFU.
SDM MENU
I NTERM LVL TX OOF There is a framing loss of an
int ermediat e signal in t he
mult iplexed signal of a t ribut ary
from t he user equipment .
RX OUTPUT FAI LED Tribut ary on t he SDM: out put t o
cust omer failed.
Check t he MUX Replace Me LED. I f
t he MUXes are okay, check for a
short circuit in t he cable or t he
user equipment . Also check t he
clock signal. I f all of t his is okay,
replace t he MUXes and t he SDM.
SDM UNKNOWN The soft ware does not support t he
model of t he SDM.
Upgrade t he soft ware wit h t he
lat est version.
Message Ex pl anat i on Act i on
5- 22 Har r i s St r at ex Net w or k s
Chapt er 5. Tr oubl eshoot i ng
TX I NPUT AI S Tribut ary on t he SDM: AI S received
from t he cust omer.
Check t he MUX Replace Me LED. I f
t he MUXes are okay, check t he
user equipment .
TX I NPUT CODE
ERROR
Tribut ary on t he SDM: code errors
or bipolar violat ion.
Check t he MUX Replace Me LED. I f
t he MUXes are okay, check t he
user equipment .
TX I NPUT LOS Tribut ary on t he SDM: loss of input
from t he cust omer.
Check t he MUX Replace Me LED. I f
t he MUXes are okay, check t he
user equipment .
TX I NPUT OOF Tribut ary on t he SDM: loss of
framing from t he cust omer.
Check t he MUX Replace Me LED. I f
t he MUXes are okay, check t he
user equipment .
SYSTEM MENU
ATPC TX A/ B HI GH
POWER
Tx power is above t he coordinat ed
Tx power on side x.
I ndicat es a probable fading
condit ion at t he remot e sit e. Traffic
is not necessarily affect ed. I f t his
alarm is frequent , review t he
coordinat ed Tx power.
BANDWI DTH
UNKNOWN
The configured capacit y is not
support ed in t he current frequency
band.
Download t he lat est soft ware
version. I f t his does not solve t he
problem, eit her configure anot her
capacit y or replace t he RFU wit h a
RFU t hat has a different frequency
band opt ion.
BER This indicat es t hat t he BER is above
t he t hreshold ( 10E- 6) in 1+ 1 and
1+ 0 syst ems.
I ndicat es a pat h problem. Check
for a RSL alarm. I f t his alarm
persist s, check for ant enna
alignment or for t he RFU Replace
Me LED, modem Replace Me LED
or modem cable alarm.
BER A & B This indicat es t hat t he BER is above
t he t hreshold for Channel A and/ or
Channel B in 2+ 0 syst ems.
See BER.
CABLE A There is a cable problem bet ween
t he SPU and RFU A.
Check t he modem Cable Alarm
LED.
CABLE B There is a cable problem bet ween
t he SPU and RFU B.
Check t he modem Cable Alarm
LED.
CNTLR REPLACE ME I ndicat es local cont roller EEPROM
corrupt ion.
Replace t he cont roller card.
CONFI G FI LE The syst em could not rest ore t he
configurat ion from t he config files;
t he default values were used.
Review all t he configurat ion values
and correct t hem as needed.
DHCP CLI ENT FAI LED I ndicat es communicat ion failure
wit h a DHCP server.
Check for connect ivit y wit h a DHCP
server on t he LAN. I f no DHCP
server is available, change t he
configurat ion.
Message Ex pl anat i on Act i on
I MN- 903003- E07 June 2008 5- 23
TRuepoi nt

5000 & 4040 Oper at or I nt er f ace


EVENT LOG UPDATE
FAI LED
The previous at t empt t o updat e t he
Event Log sink has failed.
FLASH FI LE SYSTEM Failed writ e at t empt s t o t he MMC
card.
I f t his alarm persist s or is frequent ,
replace t he MMC card on t he
cont roller board. I f t his does not
solve t he problem, report it t o
Harris St rat ex Net works.
I NVALI D SW KEY The exist ing soft ware key could not
be validat ed.
Check your soft ware key set t ings
and t hen cont act Harris St rat ex
Net works cust omer service.
LI NK I D The remot e radio has an
unexpect ed link I D.
LOAD CORRUPTED The current soft ware load has
missing or corrupt ed component s.
Upgrade t he soft ware wit h t he
lat est version.
LOGI N ATTACK There has been an unaut horized
login at t empt ( s) t hat exceeds t he
t hreshold.
MDM A SPI
COMMUNI CATI ON
Communicat ion bet ween t he
Cont roller and Modem A is broken.
I f t he problem persist s or is t oo
frequent , replace t he cont roller
first . I f t his does not solve t he
issue, replace t he modem. Last ly,
replace t he SPU enclosure.
MDM B SPI
COMMUNI CATI ON
Communicat ion bet ween t he
Cont rol and Modem B is broken.
See MDM A SPI COMMUNI CATI ON
MUX A SPI
COMMUNI CATI ON
Communicat ion bet ween t he
Cont roller and MUX A is broken.
I f t he problem persist s or is t oo
frequent , replace t he cont roller
first . I f t his does not solve t he
issue, replace t he MUX. Last ly,
replace t he SPU enclosure.
MUX B SPI
COMMUNI CATI ON
Communicat ion bet ween t he
Cont roller and MUX B is broken.
See MUX A SPI COMMUNI CATI ON
MUX B REMOVAL
REQD
MUX B must be removed. Remove MUX B.
MUX CARD
MI SMATCH
The MUX opt ions are incompat ible,
or t he MUX hardware keys do not
mat ch or t he SDM does not mat ch
t he MUXes.
Check t he MUX opt ions, t he SDM
and t he MUX hardware keys and
replace t he inappropriat e cards or
keys.
NO ETHERNET
ADDRESS
No Et hernet ( MAC) address is
specified.
Ent er an address.
NO RF NEI GHBOR There is no service channel
communicat ion wit h t he remot e
radio over t he RF link.
Message Ex pl anat i on Act i on
5- 24 Har r i s St r at ex Net w or k s
Chapt er 5. Tr oubl eshoot i ng
OPT 1 SPI
COMMUNI CATI ON
Communicat ion bet ween t he
Cont roller and t he Opt ion 1 card is
broken.
I f t he problem persist s or is t oo
frequent , replace t he cont roller
first . I f t his does not solve t he
issue, replace t he opt ional card.
Last ly, replace t he SPU enclosure.
OPT 2 SPI
COMMUNI CATI ON
Communicat ion bet ween t he
Cont roller and t he Opt ion 2 card is
broken.
See OPT 1 SPI COMMUNI CATI ON
RADI US SERVER
ACCESS FAI LED
The radius server could not be
accessed for aut hent icat ion.
REBOOT Syst em is reboot ing.
RF LI NK SVC FAI L I ndicat es t he loss of t he service
channel wit h t he remot e sit e.
This problem may be caused by a
pat h problem, an equipment
failure on t he local receiver or t he
remot e t ransmit t er, or removal or
reboot ing of t he cont roller card at
t he remot e sit e. I f t he problem
persist s for more t han 5 minut es
and t he t ribut ary t raffic is not
affect ed, it is likely t hat t he remot e
cont roller failed or was removed.
RFU A
COMMUNI CATI ON
Communicat ion bet ween t he SPU
and RFU A is broken.
Reboot t he cont roller. I f t his does
not solve t he problem, t urn off t he
modem, wait and a few seconds
and t hen t urn t he modem on
again. I f t he problem is st ill not
solved, t ry replacing t he cont roller,
t he modem, t he RFU, or finally t he
SPU enclosure.
RFU B
COMMUNI CATI ON
Communicat ion bet ween t he SPU
and RFU B is broken.
See RFU A COMMUNI CATI ON
RFU MI SMATCH RFU A does not mat ch t he
frequency band of RFU B.
Replace one of t he RFUs wit h a RFU
t hat has t he frequency opt ion of
t he ot her.
SDM MI SMATCH The SDM card does not mat ch t he
syst em capabilit y ( MUX) .
Check t he MUX opt ions, t he SDM
and t he MUX hardware keys and
replace t he inappropriat e cards or
keys.
SDM REMOVAL REQD The SDM must be removed. Remove t he SDM.
TPC TI ME LI MI T Tx power is above t he coordinat ed
Tx power longer t han t he t ime
limit at ion allows.
Review t he coordinat ed Tx power
or t he configured maximum t ime
period.
TPC A/ B TI ME LI MI T Tx power is above t he coordinat ed
Tx power longer t han t he t ime
limit at ion allows.
Review t he coordinat ed Tx power
or t he configured maximum t ime
period.
Message Ex pl anat i on Act i on
I MN- 903003- E07 June 2008 6- 1
Chapt er 6. Sof t w ar e Menu Tr ee
The following figures display the items in the radio software menus when using the
hand-held terminal or a PC running VT-100 terminal emulation.
Menus are dependent on your syst em configurat ion and t hus vary from
syst em t o syst em. This menu t ree covers mult iple possibilit ies and should
not be viewed as an exact replica of your syst em.
Figure 6-1. Main Menu
Figure 6-2. Some Alt ernat e Displays
NE ADDRESS LCL NE address selection screen
ALARM See Figure 6- 3
STATUS See Figure 6- 5
PERFORMANCE See Figure 6- 7
CONTROL See Figure 6- 8
CONFI GURATI ON See Figure 6- 9
SYSTEM DESCRI PTI ON System description screen
The displays below are not on the menu tree, but appear under certain
circumstances, replacing the current display from the menu tree.
ABSENT
Appears when items in a particular
menu are not installed.
S/ W CORRUPTED
Appears if the software in the RFU is
corrupted.
FORGOT PASSWORD?
Appears in the main menu when a
user has logged in as a guest.
6- 2 Har r i s St r at ex Net w or k s
Chapt er 6. Sof t w ar e Menu Tr ee
Figure 6-3. The Alarm Branch
TX A/ B LOCK
LOCK RX RFU DECODER A/ B
LOCK RX DADE DEMUX A/ B
MODEM I F LOOPBACK
MUX HI GH LEVEL LOOPBACK
I f you have TRI B DS1/ E1
I f you have OC3/ STS3
I f you have TRI B DS3
I f you have WAYSI DE
RFU A/ B MUTED
TX A/ B CW TONE
TX REVERT TO A OVERRI DE
CONTROL ACTI VE
MODEM A/ B
NE ADDRESS
ALARM
STATUS
PERFORMANCE
CONTROL
CONFI GURATI ON
SYSTEM DESCRI PTI ON
MAI N MENU
SYSTEM
PATH
CONTROL ACTI VE
EXTERNAL ALARMS
CARD ABSENT
MODEM A, B
MUX A, B
RFU A, B
OPT 1, 2
SDM
MAJOR ALM
MI NOR ALM
REMOTE ALM
NOTE: THE I TEMS I N THI S
BRANCH VARY
DEPENDI NG I F THE I TEM
I S I N ALARM OR NOT.
RSL A/ B LOW
SI GNAL A/ B DEGRADED
ALI GNMENT
REMOTE SYNC LOSS
DEMUX A/ B SYNC LOSS
DEMUX A/ B WAYSI DE SYNC LOSS
MUX RMT LOF
PATH
ALARM
MUX A/ B ABSENT
MDM A/ B ABSENT
RFU A/ B ABSENT
OPT 1/ 2 ABSENT
SDM ABSENT
CARD ABSENT
NO ETHERNET ADDRESS
DHCP CLI ENT FAI LED
REBOOT
LOAD CORRUPTED
CABLE A/ B
MUX B REMOVAL REQUI RED
SDM REMOVAL REQUI RED
MUX CARD MI SMATCH
SDM MI SMATCH
RFU MI SMATCH
MDM A/ B SPI COMMUNI CATI ON
MUX A/ B SPI COMMUNI CATI ON
OPT 1/ 2 SPI COMMUNI CATI ON
RFU A/ B COMMUNI CATI ON
FLASH FI LE SYSTEM
CONFI G FI LE
ATPC HI GH POWER
ATPC TX A/ B HI GH POWER
TPC TI ME LI MI T
TPC A/ B TI ME LI MI T
BER
BER A/ B
NO RF NEI GHBOR
BANDWI DTH UNKNOWN
LOGI N ATTACK
LI NK I D
I NVALI D SW KEY
EVENT LOG UPDATE FAI LED
RADI US SERVER ACCESS FAI LED
CNTLR REPLACE ME
RF LI NK SVC FAI L
LOG XFFR FAI L
SYSTEM
EXTERNAL ALARMS
CONTROLLER EXTERNAL I NPUT 1
CONTROLLER EXTERNAL I NPUT 2
OPTI ONAL 1 EXTERNAL I NPUT
OPTI ONAL 2 EXTERNAL I NPUT
MDM A/ B UNKNOWN
MDM A/ B NOT UPGRADED
MDM A/ B FPGA DOWNLOAD
MDM A/ B FPGA SETTI NG
MDM A/ B REPLACE ME
MDM A/ B SYNTHESI ZER
MDM A/ B WRONG OPTI ON
MDM A/ B BATTERY
WAYSI DE
WAYSI DE Y LOCAL I NPUT LOOPBACK
WAYSI DE Y LOCAL RADI O LOOPBACK
WAYSI DE Y REMOTE RADI O LOOPBACK
WAYSI DE Y REMOTE RADI O LOOPBACK
REQUEST
TRI B DS3 X LOCAL I NPUT LOOPBACK
TRI B DS3 X LOCAL RADI O LOOPBACK
TRI B DS3 X REMOTE RADI O LOOPBACK
TRI B DS3 X REMOTE RADI O LOOPBACK
REQUEST
TRI B X LOCAL I NPUT LOOPBACK
TRI B X LOCAL RADI O LOOPBACK
TRI B X REMOTE RADI O LOOPBACK
TRI B X REMOTE RADI O LOOPBACK
REQUEST
TRI B DS3
TRI B DS1/ E1
155 MB LOCAL I NPUT LOOPBACK
155 MB LOCAL RADI O LOOPBACK
155 MB REMOTE RADI O LOOPBACK
155 MB REMOTE RADI O LOOPBACK
REQUEST
OC3/ STS3
I MN- 903003- E07 June 2008 6- 3
TRuepoi nt

5000 & 4040 Oper at or I nt er f ace


Figure 6-4. The Alarm Branch cont inued
SYSTEM
PATH
CONTROL ACTI VE
EXTERNAL ALARMS
CARD ABSENT
MODEM A, B
MUX A, B
RFU A, B
OPT 1, 2
SDM
MAJOR ALM
MI NOR ALM
REMOTE ALM
ALARM
NE ADDRESS
ALARM
STATUS
PERFORMANCE
CONTROL
CONFI GURATI ON
SYSTEM DESCRI PTI ON
MAI N MENU
MUX A/ B
NOTE: THE I TEMS I N THI S
BRANCH VARY
DEPENDI NG I F THE I TEM
I S I N ALARM OR NOT.
MUX A/ B UNKNOWN
MUX A/ B NOT UPGRADED
MUX A/ B FPGA DOWNLOAD
MUX A/ B FPGA SETTI NG
MUX A/ B I NTERM LVL RX OOF
I f you have OC3/ STS3
I f you have subSTM1
I f you have TRI B DS1/ E1
I f you have TRI B DS3
I f you have 100BT
I f you have WAYSI DE
MUX A/ B TX CLOCK I NPUT LOSS
MUX A/ B REPLACE ME
RFU A/ B
RFU A/ B FAI LED
RFU A/ B NOT UPGRADED
RFU A/ B SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD
RFU A/ B SETTI NG
RFU A/ B RX EQUI PMENT
RFU A/ B TX EQUI PMENT
RFU A/ B EEPROM
RFU A/ B SYNTHESI ZER
RFU A/ B PA LOW
RFU A/ B PA OUTPUT OUT OF RANGE
RFU A/ B REPLACE ME
RFU A/ B TX SI LENT FAI LURE
RFU A/ B CALI BRATI ON TABLE MI SMATCH
RFU A/ B MUTE FOR TELEMETRY
RFU A/ B FREQUENCY CONFI GURATI ON
WAYSI DE
TX I NPUT AI S
TX I NPUT LOS
TX I NPUT CODE ERROR
RX OUTPUT FAI LED
TX I NPUT AI S
TX I NPUT LOS
TX I NPUT CODE ERROR
TX I NPUT OOF
RX OUTPUT FAI LED
TX I NPUT LOS
TX I NPUT AI S
TX I NPUT DEGRADED
TRI B DS3
OC3/ STS3
SDM
SDM UNKNOWN
I f you have TRI B DS1/ E1
I f you have TRI B DS3
I f you have WAYSI DE
OPT 1/ 2
OPT 1/ 2 UNKNOWN
OPT 1/ 2 NOT UPGRADED
OPT 1/ 2 FPGA DOWNLOAD
OPT 1/ 2 FPGA SETTI NG
OPT 1/ 2 NOT SUPPORTED I N SI MPLEX
OPT 1/ 2 REPLACE ME
OPT 1/ 2 ETHERNETOVER64K PORT Y LI NK
FAI LED
OPT 1/ 2 10BT COMM
TX I NPUT AI S
TX I NPUT LOS
TX I NPUT CODE ERROR
I NTERM LVL TX OOF
RX OUTPUT FAI LED
TRI B DS1/ E1
WAYSI DE
TX I NPUT AI S
TX I NPUT LOS
TX I NPUT CODE ERROR
RX OUTPUT FAI LED
TX I NPUT AI S
TX I NPUT LOS
TX I NPUT CODE ERROR
TX I NPUT OOF
RX OUTPUT FAI LED
TRI B DS3
TX I NPUT AI S
TX I NPUT LOS
TX I NPUT CODE ERROR
I NTERM LVL TX OOF
RX OUTPUT FAI LED
TRI B DS1/ E1
RDI I N ALM
Sub STM1
PORT Y LI NK FAI LED
100BT
6- 4 Har r i s St r at ex Net w or k s
Chapt er 6. Sof t w ar e Menu Tr ee
Figure 6-5. The St at us Branch
NE ADDRESS
ALARM
STATUS
PERFORMANCE
CONTROL
CONFI GURATI ON
SYSTEM DESCRI PTI ON
MAI N MENU
ONLI NE EQUI PMENT
SYSTEM
RADI O
NETWORK MANAGEMENT
TI ME MANAGEMENT
RELAYS
I NVENTORY
S/ W DETAI L
CLK MANAGEMENT
LAST REBOOT REASON
CAPABI LI TY XXXXXXXX
USED CAPACI TY XXXXXXXX
CHANNEL BW XXX MHz
MODULATI ON XXXXXXXX
RFU FREQ XXX GHz
SYS PROT XXXXXXXX
MUX TRAF SI NGLE/ SPLI T DUAL
MUX PROT PROT/ UNPROT
DUPLEX XXXXXXXX
TI MI NG CLK A/ B XXXXXXXX
TMG MDM A/ B XXXXXXXX
TMG WEST A/ B XXXXXXXX
LI NK I D
OPT 1
OPT 2
ADM DROP STATUS
ETHERNET STATUS
MUX ETH 1/ 2 LI NK
MUX A/ B ETH 1/ 2 LI NK
OPT 1/ 2 ETH 1/ 2 LI NK
STATUS
ONLI NE EQUI PMENT
SYSTEM
CNTRL RELAY 1 ENG/ DEN
CNTRL RELAY 2 ENG/ DEN
CNTRL RELAY 3 ENG/ DEN
CNTRL RELAY 4 ENG/ DEN
OPT1 RELAY 0..11 ENG/ DEN
OPT2 RELAY 0..11 ENG/ DEN
RELAYS
NE ADDRESS XXX
NETCOM I NTERFACE
NETCOM I P DI SABLED
ETHERNET I NTERFACE
ETHER I P DI SABLED
DEFAULT ROUTER XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
NETWORK MANAGEMENT
PA TX A PWR XXX dBm
REF TX A PWR XXX dBm
PA TX B PWR XXX dBm
REF TX B PWR XXX dBm
LNA RSL A XXX dBm
REF RSL A XXX dBm
LNA RSL B XXX dBm
REF RSL B XXX dBm
RSL A STATUS OK/ LOW
RSL B STATUS OK/ LOW
TX A XXX kHz
TX B XXX kHz
RX A XXX kHz
RX B XXX kHz
RFU FAMI LY A XXXX
RFU FAMI LY B XXXX
RFU A TEMP XXX C
RFU A MAX TEMP XXX C
RPC A TEMP XXX C
RFU B TEMP XXX C
RFU B MAX TEMP XXX C
RPC B TEMP XXX C
TPC MODE
MANUAL/ ATPC/ DTPC
ELAPSE DD: HH: MM: SS
TPC EXCEED XXX %
RADI O
MUX A/ B TX ONLI NE
MDM A/ B TX ONLI NE
RFU A/ B TX ONLI NE
MUX A/ B RX ONLI NE
MDM A/ B RX ONLI NE
RFU A/ B RX ONLI NE
MUX A/ B SEL BY ADM SELECTED
ETHER I P STATUS
I P ADDR MODE
I NTERFACE
ADR
MSK
ETHERNET I NTERFACE
NETCOM I P STATUS
I P ADDR MODE
I NTERFACE
ADR
MSK
NETCOM I NTERFACE
TI ME ZONE XX: XX
DAYLI GHT SAV XX: XX
LCL DATE YYYY-MM-DD
LCL TI ME HH: MM: SS
GMT DATE YYYY-MM-DD
GMT TI ME HH: MM: SS
SNYC MODE XXX
PRI MARY SNTP SERV
SECOND. SNTP SERV
USED SNTP SERV
SERV. MODE XXX
TI ME MANAGEMENT
TRI B 1 RADI O/ I NPUT
...
TRI B 8 RADI O/ I NPUT
ADM DROP STATUS
MUX ETH 1 10/ 100 MBPS
MUX ETH 1 FULL DUPLEX/
HALF DUPLEX
ETHERNET STATUS
I MN- 903003- E07 June 2008 6- 5
TRuepoi nt

5000 & 4040 Oper at or I nt er f ace


Figure 6-6. The St at us Branch cont inued
ONLI NE EQUI PMENT
SYSTEM
RADI O
NETWORK MANAGEMENT
TI ME MANAGEMENT
RELAYS
I NVENTORY
S/ W DETAI L
CLK MANAGEMENT
LAST REBOOT REASON
STATUS
MUX A (B) S1 BYTE XXXX
MUX A (B) CLK XXXXXXXX
MUX A (B) MDM S1 XXXX
MUX A (B) RPTR S1 XXXX
MUX A (B) SPUR S1 XXXX
CLOCK MANAGEMENT
Type of RFU list ed here (GHz)
TX N MI N XXXXXXX kHz
TX N MAX XXXXXXX kHz
RX N MI N XXXXXXX kHz
RX N MAX XXXXXXX kHz
ATTEN N MAX XXX dB
S/ W VER XXXX
SETTI NG VER XXXX
BOOT VER XXXX
RPC CAL VER XXXX
TX CAL VER XXXX
RX CAL VER XXXX
HPA CAL VER XXXX
PN XXX-XXXXXX-XXX
SN HSFNXX
TXPN XXX-XXXXXX-XXX
TXSN HSFNXX
RXPN XXX-XXXXXX-XXX
RXSN HSFNXX
RPCPN XXX-XXXXXX-XXX
RPCSN HSFNXX
MFG DATE XX-XX-XXXX
CLEI XXXXXXXX
RFU A, B
NE ADDRESS
ALARM
STATUS
PERFORMANCE
CONTROL
CONFI GURATI ON
SYSTEM DESCRI PTI ON
MAI N MENU
I NVENTOR S/ W DETAI L
PRI LOAD XX.XX.XX
ALT LOAD XX.XX.XX
CONTROLLER
MUX A
MUX B
MODEM A
MODEM B
OPT CARD 1
OPT CARD 2
RFU A
RFU B
S/ W VER XXXX
ALT S/ W VER XXXX
BOOT VER XXXX
CONTROLLER
F/ W VER XXXX
SETTI NG VER XXXX
PRI F/ W VER XXXX
PRI SETTI NG XXXX
ALT F/ W VER XXXX
ALT SETTI NG XXXX
MODEM A, B
F/ W VER XXXX
SETTI NG VER XXXX
PRI F/ W VER XXXX
PRI SETTI NG XXXX
ALT F/ W VER XXXX
ALT SETTI NG XXXX
MUX A, B
F/ W VER XXXX
SETTI NG VER XXXX
PRI F/ W VER XXXX
PRI SETTI NG XXXX
ALT F/ W VER XXXX
ALT SETTI NG XXXX
OPT CARD 1, 2
S/ W VER XXXX
SETTI NG VER XXXX
PRI S/ W VER XXXX
PRI SETTI NG XXXX
ALT S/ W VER XXXX
ALT SETTI NG XXXX
RFU A, B
CONTROLLER
MUX A
MUX B
MODEM A
MODEM B
OPT CARD 1
OPT CARD 2
SDM
RFU A
RFU B
BACKPLANE
SW KEYS
I NVENTORY
Type of OPTI ONAL CARD list ed here.
F/ W VER XXXX
SETTI NG VER XXXX
PN XXX-XXXXXX-XXX
SN HSFNXX
CLEI XXXXXXXX
REVI SI ON XX
DATE XX-XX-XXXX
OPT CARD 1,2
Type of SDM list ed here.
SDM
Type of MODEM list ed here.
F/ W VER XXXX
SETTI NG VER XXXX
PN XXX-XXXXXX-XXX
SN HSFNXX
CLEI XXXXXXXX
REVI SI ON XX
DATE XX-XX-XXXX
SPLI T DUAL MUX YES/ NO
MODEM A, B
KPAD/ TELNET AVAI L/ UNAVAI L
WEB CI T AVAI L/ UNAVAI L
EVENT LOG AVAI L/ UNAVAI L
TI ME SYNC AVAI L/ UNAVAI L
STRNG SECUR AVAI L/ UNAVAI L
MUX A/ B DS1 TRI BS XXX
MUX A/ B E1 TRI BS XXX
SPLT DUAL MUX CAP XXX
SECURI TY LEVEL MED/ HI GH
SW KEYS
Type of MUX list ed here.
I NTERFACE UNKNOWN/ ELECTR/ SNGLOPT/
MLTI OPT
H/ W KEY FAI LED/ NONE/ 4TRI Bs/ 8TRI Bs/
12TRI Bs/ 16TRI Bs
F/ W VER XXXX
SETTI NG VER XXXX
PN XXX-XXXXXX-XXX
SN HSFNXX
CLEI XXXXXXXX
REVI SI ON XX
DATE XX-XX-XXXX
MUX A, B
S/ W VER XXXX
ALT S/ W VER XXXX
BOOT VER XXXX
PN XXX-XXXXXX-XXX
SN XXXXXXXX
CLEI XXXXXXXX
REVI SI ON XX
DATE XX-XX-XXXX
FLASH I D XXXXXX
FS1
FS2
CONTROLLER
Type of Backplane list ed here.
BACKPLANE
6- 6 Har r i s St r at ex Net w or k s
Chapt er 6. Sof t w ar e Menu Tr ee
Figure 6-7. The Performance Branch
NE ADDRESS
ALARM
STATUS
PERFORMANCE
CONTROL
CONFI GURATI ON
SYSTEM DESCRI PTI ON
MAI N MENU
MEASUREMENT RUN/ STOP
BER XXXXXXX
BER A/ B XXXXXXX
TI ME XXd XXh XX: XX
SYS BER
ERR SEC
LATCH ERR SEC
ETHERNET STATS
G703/ V11
RESET STATI STI CS EXEC
ET XXd XXh XX: XX
UNAV XXd XXh XX: XX
AV XXd XXh XX: XX
EFS XXXXXXXX
ES XXXXXXXX
SES XXXXXXXX
BBE XXXXXXXX
SEP XXXXXXXX
EFSR XXX%
ESR XXX%
SESR XXX%
UNAVR XXX%
BBER XXX%
SEPI XXX%
SYS BER
ERR SEC
1
PERFORMANCE
ET XXd XXh XX: XX
UNAV XXd XXh XX: XX
AV XXd XXh XX: XX
EFS XXXXXXXX
ES XXXXXXXX
SES XXXXXXXX
BBE XXXXXXXX
SEP XXXXXXXX
EFSR XXX%
ESR XXX%
SESR XXX%
UNAVR XXX%
BBER XXX%
SEPI XXX%
LATCH ERR SEC
1
1. I f you have a 2+ 0 syst em, t hem ERR SEC and LATCH ERR SEC will be available for
bot h MUX A and MUX B.
1/ 2 RESET COUNTERS
1/ 2 TX FULL XXX%
1/ 2 RX FULL XXX%
1/ 2 TX EMPTY XXX%
1/ 2 RX EMPTY XXX%
1/ 2 TX CLK FAI L XXX%
G703/ V11
MGMT BRI DGE
MUX BRI DGE
MUX A/ B
OPT 1/ 2
ETHERNET STATS
I N FRAMES XXXX
OUT FRAMES XXXX
I N DI SCARDS XXXX
DLY DI SCARDS XXXX
MTU DI SCARDS XXXX
ALL OPTI ONS
NMS 1
NMS 2
MGMT BRI DGE
PORT 1
PORT 2
AI R PORT
MUX BRI DGE
PORT 1
PORT 2
AI R PORT
MUX A/ B
PORT 1
PORT 2
OPT 1/ 2
I MN- 903003- E07 June 2008 6- 7
TRuepoi nt

5000 & 4040 Oper at or I nt er f ace


Figure 6-8. The Cont rol Branch
TRI B X DT LPBK SET/ CLR
or:
TRI B Ax/ Bx DT LPBK SET/ CLR
DS1 DEST LPBK
NE ADDRESS
ALARM
STATUS
PERFORMANCE
CONTROL
CONFI GURATI ON
SYSTEM DESCRI PTI ON
MAI N MENU
LOCK
SWI TCH
ADM DROP SELECT
LOOPBACK
TRANSMI T
RELAYS
RFU DOWNLOAD
SELECT S/ W
REBOOT SYSTEM
HI GH LVL LPBK
RMT RADI O LPBK
DS1 DEST LPBK
LOCAL LPBK
WS 1, 2, 3 LPBK
CONTROL
LOOPBACK
LOCK TX OUT A/ B SET/ CLR
LOCK TX MUX A/ B SET/ CLR
LOCK RA/ DECDR A/ B SET/ CLR
LOCK RXD/ DMUX A/ B SET/ CLR
LOCK
TX MDM/ RF SI DE A/ SI DE B
TX MUX SI DE A/ SI DE B
RX/ DECDR SI DE A/ SI DE B
RXD/ DMUX SI DE A/ SI DE B
TX MDM/ RF
TX MUX
RX/ DECDR
RXD/ DMUX
REVERT TO A
SWI TCH
MDM I F LPBK SET/ CLR
MUX LPBK SET/ CLR
or:
MDM A/ B I F LPBK SET/ CLR
MUX A/ B LPBK SET/ CLR
HI GH LVL LPBK
WS1 (2,3) LOC LPBK
I NPUT/ RADI O/ NO LPBK
or:
WS A1/ B1 LOC LPBK
I NPUT/ RADI O/ NO LPBK
WS1 (2,3) RMT LPBK SET/ CLR
or:
WS A1/ B1 RMT LPBK SET/ CLR
WS LPBK
TX-A MUTE ON/ OFF
TX-B MUTE ON/ OFF
CW TONE A ON/ OFF
CW TONE B ON/ OFF
RESET TPC STAT
TRANSMI T
CNTRL RELAY 1 SET/ CLR
...
CNTRL RELAY 4 SET/ CLR
OPT 1 RELAY 0 SET/ CLR
...
OPT 1 RELAY 11 SET/ CLR
OPT 2 RELAY 0 SET/ CLR
...
OPT 2 RELAY 11 SET/ CLR
RELAYS
UPGRADE RFU A
UPGRADE RFU B
RFU A DWLD XXX%
RFU B DWLD XXX%
RFU DOWNLOAD
PRI LOAD XXX
ALT LOAD XXX
RUN ALT SOFTWARE EXEC
RUN ALT SYSTEM EXEC
FI RMWARE UPGRADE EXEC
SELECT SW
For any E1/ DS1 &
100BT+ 4E1/ DS1:
TRI B X RMT LPBK SET/ CLR
or:
TRI B Ax/ Bx RMT LPBK SET/ CLR
or For OC3/ STS3:
MUX RMT LPBK SET/ CLR
or:
MUX Ax/ Bx RMT LPBK SET/ CLR
or FOR DS3:
TRI B 1 (2,3) RMT LPBK SET/ CLR
or:
TRI B A1/ B1 RMT LPBK SET/ CLR
RMT RADI O LPBK
For any E1/ DS1 &
100BT+ 4E1/ DS1:
TRI B X LOC LPBK
I NPUT/ RADI O/ NO LPBK
or:
TRI B Ax/ Bx LOC LPBK
I NPUT/ RADI O/ NO LPBK
or For OC3/ STS3:
MUX LOC LPBK
I NPUT/ RADI O/ NO LPBK
or:
MUX Ax/ Bx LOC LPBK
I NPUT/ RADI O/ NO LPBK
or FOR DS3:
TRI B 1 (2,3) LOC LPBK
I NPUT/ RADI O/ NO LPBK
or:
TRI B A1/ B1 LOC LPBK
I NPUT/ RADI O/ NO LPBK
LOCAL LPBK
HI GH LVL LPBK
TRI B 1 DROP SEL
...
TRI B 8 DROP SEL
ADM DROP SELECT
6- 8 Har r i s St r at ex Net w or k s
Chapt er 6. Sof t w ar e Menu Tr ee
Figure 6-9. The Configurat ion Branch
SYSTEM
TRI BUTARI ES
NETWORK MANAGEMENT
TI ME MANAGEMENT
RELAYS
EXTERNAL ALARMS
ORDERWI RE
G703/ V11 OPT 1/ 2
10BT/ 64K OPT 1/ 2
DATA CHANNEL
COMM PORT SETTI NGS
SECURI TY
ENABLE LOGI N ON/ OFF
CONFI GURATI ON
SPU
RFU
OUTPUT POWER
LI NK I D 0-99
SYSTEM
NE ADDRESS
ALARM
STATUS
PERFORMANCE
CONTROL
CONFI GURATI ON
SYSTEM DESCRI PTI ON
MAI N MENU
USED CAPACI TY
2
See foot not e.
SYS PROTECTI ON
UNPROT/ 2UNPROT/ MSHB/ FD/ SD/ FD+ SD
MUX PROTECTI ON UNPROT/ PROTECTED
MUX TRAFFI C SI NGLE/ SPLI T DUAL
MUX PAYLOAD ENABLE/ DI SABLE
DUPLEX MODE SI MPLEX T/ SI MPLEX R/ DUPLEX
CHANNEL BW XXX MHz
APS UNI DI RECTI ONAL/ BI DI RECTI ONAL
OPT CARD 1/ 2 ENABLE/ DI SABLE
SHOW PATH ALARMS SHOW/ HI DE
PATH ALARM HOLD ON 0-60 sec.
RCS MODE SI MPLE/ SMART/ DI SABLE
RCS DELAY 0/ 2/ 4/ 6/ 8/ 10/ 12/ 14/ 16/ 18/ 20
DANGR CTRL TI MEOUT XXX min.
TX REVERT TO A OFF/ ON
I NSERT AI S ON TRI B
CONFI G FI LE ALM
SPU
TX FREQ XXX kHz
RX FREQ XXX kHz
TX A FREQ XXX kHz
RX A FREQ XXX kHz
TX A ACU LOSS X.X dB
RX A ACU LOSS X.X dB
TX B FREQ XXX kHz
RX B FREQ XXX kHz
TX B ACU LOSS X.X dB
RX B ACU LOSS X.X dB
RSSI OUT PROPORT/ I NVERTED
RFU
TPC MODE MANUAL/ ATPC/ DTPC
TX A/ B STAT ATTEN 0-40dB I NCREMENTS OF .5
ATPC REM RSL THR 0-25 dB
ATPC BOOST STEP 0-15 dB
TX A/ B COORD ATTEN 0-25 dB
MAX EXCEED % 0-100%
NOMI NAL REM RSL -70 t o -20 dBm
OUTPUT POWER
2. See t he following t able for available values.
Max . Sy st em Capabi l i t y Avai l abl e val ues
NxE1 2E1, 4E1, 8E1, 16E1
NxDS1 4DS1, 8DS1, 12DS1, 16DS1
OC3/ STM1 OC3- STS3, STM1
Sub STM1 Sub STM1
21E1 21E1
28DS1+ WS 28DS1, 28DS1+ WS
3DS3+ WS 3DS3, 3DS3+ WS
DS3+ DS1 DS3, DS3+ DS1, E3+ E1
100BT+ DS1 DS3, DS3+ DS1, E3+ E1, 100BT, 100BT+ E1, 100BT+ DS1
mix100BT+ 100DS1 mix4DS1, mix8DS1, mix12DS1, mix16DS1, mix29DS1, mix58DS1, mix87DS1, mix100DS1, 100BT+ 4DS1
mix100BT+ STM1 mix2E1, mix4E1, mix8E1, mix16E1, mix35E1, mix50E1, mix75E1, mix100BT+ 4E1, mix32E1- dm
ADM8DS1/ DS3+ DS1 8DS1ADM ( DS3) , 8DS1ADMws ( DS3+ DS1)
I MN- 903003- E07 June 2008 6- 9
TRuepoi nt

5000 & 4040 Oper at or I nt er f ace


Figure 6-10. The Configurat ion Branch cont inued
ENABLE
TX TUG3 SELECT
RX TUG3 SELECT
CODE
EQUALI ZER
FRAMED
FRAMI NG
ADM ADD I NPUT
ADM ADD RADI O
ADM DROP I NPUT
ADM DROP RADI O
ADM DROP MODE
TRI B SD THRESH NONE/ 1E-6/ 1E-7
1E-8/ 1E-9/ 1E-10
TDM
DS1, E1, E3, STM1, OC3 & 21E1 syst ems:
TRI BUTARY x ENABLE/ DI SABLE
or:
TRI BUTARY Ax/ Bx ENABLE/ DI SABLE
DS3 syst ems:
TRI BUTARY 1 ENABLE/ DI SABLE
I f you have 3DS3 + WS:
TRI BUTARY 2/ 3 ENABLE/ DI SABLE
or:
TRI BUTARY A1/ B1 ENABLE/ DI SABLE
100BT or mi x syst ems:
MUX PORT 1/ 2 NO/ YES
or:
MUX A/ B PORT 1/ 2 NO/ YES
ENABLE
MUX TX TUG SELECT TUG3 1/ 2/ 3
or:
MUX A/ B TX TUG SELECT TUG3 1/ 2/ 3
TX TUG SELECT
MUX RX TUG SELECT TUG3 1/ 2/ 3
or:
MUX A/ B RX TUG SELECT TUG3 1/ 2/ 3
RX TUG SELECT
TRI B x CODE AMI / B8ZS
or:
TRI B Ax/ Bx CODE AMI / B8ZS
CODE
DS1 syst ems:
TRI B x EQUALI ZER 0-133/ 133-266/
266-399/ 399-533/ 533-655
or:
TRI B Ax/ Bx EQUALI ZER 0-133/ 133-266/
266-399/ 399-533/ 533-655
DS3 syst ems:
TRI B 1 EQUALI ZER 0-225/ 226-450
I f you have 3DS3 + WS:
TRI B 2/ 3 EQUALI ZER 0-225/ 226-450
or:
TRI B A1/ B1 EQUALI ZER 0-225/ 226-450
EQUALI ZER
TRI B 1 FRAMED TRANSPARENT/ MFRAME
I f you have 2+ 0:
TRI B A/ B FRAMED TRANSPARENT/ MFRAME
or:
R STS1-1/ 2/ 3 FRAMED TRANSPARENT/
MFRAME
M STS1-1/ 2/ 3 FRAMED TRANSPARENT
MFRAME
FRAMED
ADD I NPUT, ADD RADI O, DROP I NPUT,
DROP RADI O, & DROP MODE:
TRI B 1-8
I f you have a 2+ 0 syst em:
TRI B Ax/ Bx
ADM
SYSTEM
TRI BUTARI ES
NETWORK MANAGEMENT
TI ME MANAGEMENT
RELAYS
EXTERNAL ALARMS
ORDERWI RE
G703/ V11 OPT 1/ 2
10BT/ 64K OPT 1/ 2
DATA CHANNEL
COMM PORT SETTI NGS
SECURI TY
ENABLE LOGI N ON/ OFF
CONFI GURATI ON
TDM
ETHERNET
WAYSI DE
EXT TI MI NG
TI MI NG SOURCE
TRI BUTARI ES
TRI B 1 FRAMI NG M1-3 asynch/ C-bit parit y
I f you also have 2+ 0:
TRI B A/ B FRAMI NGM1-3 asynch/ C-bit parit y
FRAMI NG
6- 10 Har r i s St r at ex Net w or k s
Chapt er 6. Sof t w ar e Menu Tr ee
Figure 6-11. The Configurat ion Branch cont inued
SYSTEM
TRI BUTARI ES
NETWORK MANAGEMENT
TI ME MANAGEMENT
RELAYS
EXTERNAL ALARMS
ORDERWI RE
G703/ V11 OPT 1/ 2
10BT/ 64K OPT 1/ 2
DATA CHANNEL
COMM PORT SETTI NGS
SECURI TY
ENABLE LOGI N ON/ OFF
CONFI GURATI ON
TDM
ETHERNET
WAYSI DE
EXT TI MI NG
TI MI NG SOURCE
TRI BUTARI ES
PORT SEGREGATI ON
ENABLE
FI XED RATE
AUTONEGOTI ATI ON
ETHERNET
MUX PORT SEG. ENABLE/ DI SABLE
or:
MUX A/ B PORT SEG. ENABLE/ DI SABLE
PORT SEGREGATI ON
ETHERNET PORT 1/ 2 NO/ YES
or:
ETHERNET A/ B PORT 1/ 2 NO/ YES
ENABLE
MUX PORT 1/ 2 NO LI MI T/ 1XE1...NxE1/
1xDS1...NxDS1
or:
MUX A/ B PORT 1/ 2 See Port 1/ 2
FI XED RATE
MODE
ENABLE
CODE
EQUALI ZER
WS1 TERMI NATI ON
WAYSI DE
OC3 ( DS1) , 3DS3+ 3WS, 28DS1+ WS,
100BT+ DS1, DS3+ DS1
WS 1 CODE AMI / B8ZS
or:
WS A1/ B1 CODE AMI / B8ZS
I f you have 3DS3 + WS:
WS 2/ 3 CODE AMI / B8ZS
CODE
3DS3+ 3WS, 21E1, 28DS1+ WS,
100BT+ E1,100BT+ DS1, DS3+ DS1, E3+ E1
WAYSI DE 1 ENABLE/ DI SABLE
or:
WAYSI DE A1/ B1 ENABLE/ DI SABLE
I f you have 3DS3 + WS:
WAYSI DE 2/ 3 ENABLE/ DI SABLE
ENABLE
OC3 ( DS1) , 3DS3+ 3WS, 28DS1+ WS,
100BT+ DS1, DS3+ DS1
WS 1 DS1 EQUALI ZER 0-133/ 133-266
266-399/ 399-533/ 533-655
or:
WS A1/ B1 DS1 EQUALI ZER See above.
I f you have 3DS3 + WS:
WS 2/ 3 EQUALI ZER See above.
EQUALI ZER
OC3 ONLY
WAYSI DE 1 MODE DI SABLE/ DS1/ E1
or:
WAYSI DE A1/ B1 MODE DI SABLE/ DS1/ E1
MODE
OC3 ( E1)
WS 1 TERMI NATI ON
UNBALANCED 75ohms/ BALANCED 120ohms
or:
WS A1/ B1 TERMI NATI ON See above.
WS1 TERMI NATI ON
TI MI NG MODE LI NEorEXT/ THROUGH
STM TI MI NG MODE LI NEorEXT/ THROUGH
PRI 1 TI MI NG SRC EXT. CLK/ PDH CLK/
... RADI O CLK/ LOCAL CLK
PRI 5 TI MI NG SRC Same as 1.
PDH DERI VED SRC 1..28
EXT CLK OUT SELECT NONE/
PDH DERI VED/ RADI O/ MAI N
EXT 1 SYNC QUAL XXXX
EXT 2 SYNC QUAL XXXX
PDH DR SYNC QUAL XXXX
MUX CLK SOURCE AUTOMATI C/
I NTERNAL/ EXTERNAL
TI MI NG SOURCE
ENABLE
CODE
EQUALI ZER
EXT TI MI NG
EXT TI MI NG 1/ 2 ENABLE ENABLE/ DI SABLE
ENABLE
TRI B EXT 1/ 2 CODE AMI / B8ZS
CODE
TRI B EXT 1/ 2 EQUALI ZER 0-133/ 133-266
266-399/ 399-533/ 533-655
EQUALI ZER
AUTONEGOTI ATI ON ENABLE/ DI SABLE
I f disabled:
PORT SPEED 10 MBPS/ 100 MBPS
PORT DUPLEX FULL/ HALF
AUTONEGOTI ATI ON
I MN- 903003- E07 June 2008 6- 11
TRuepoi nt

5000 & 4040 Oper at or I nt er f ace


Figure 6-12. The Configurat ion Branch cont inued
SNMP MANAGERS
COMMUNI TY STRI NGS
TRAP DESTI NATI ON
TRAP PARAMETERS
TRAP CUSTOMI ZATI ON
3
DEF USER AUTH PWD
DEF USER PRI V PWD
AUTH PROTOCOL
PRI V PROTOCOL
SNMP
NE ADDRESS 001...999
I P ROUTI NG
SNMP
PI NG
NETCOM OVER ENET ENABLE/ DI SABLE
NETCOM OVER HDLC ENABLE/ DI SABLE
BROADCST OVR RF ENABLE/ DI SABLE
BROADCST OVR HDLC ENABLE/ DI SABLE
NETWORK MANAGEMENT
TRAP COMMUNI TY
TRAP ENABLE CUSTOM/ DI SABLE
TRAP PARAMETERS
MANAGER 1 ENABLE/ DI SABLE
MANAGER 2 ENABLE/ DI SABLE
...
MANAGER 10 ENABLE/ DI SABLE
SNMP MANAGERS
DEST 1 ENABLE/ DI SABLE
DEST 2 ENABLE/ DI SABLE
...
DEST 10 ENABLE/ DI SABLE
TRAP DESTI NATI ON
3. See Trap Cust omizat ion on page 5- 13 for a list of available t raps.
PI NG I P ADDRESS
PI NG START
PI NG
GET COMMUNI TY
SET COMMUNI TY
COMMUNI TY STRI NGS
NETCOM I NTERFACE ENABLE/ DI SABLE
NCOM I P ADDR MODE AUTO/ MANUAL
NCOM MANUAL I P ADDR XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
NCOM MANUAL I P MASK XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
NCOM I P MTU SI ZE 236/ 1500
ETHERNET I NTERFACE ENABLE/ DI SABLE
ENET I P ADDR MODE MANUAL/ DHCP/ AUTO
ENET MANUAL I P ADDR XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
ENET MANUAL I P MASK XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
ENET DHCP SERVER
I P FORWARDI NG ROUTER/ HOST
DEFAULT ROUTER XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
STATI C ROUTES
DYNAMI C ROUTI NG
I P ROUTI NG
I P ROUTE N ADDRESS XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
I P ROUTE N MASK XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
NEXT I P ROUTER N XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
ROUTE N
RI P MODE DI SABLE/ RI P-2 BROADCAST
/ RI P-2 MULTI CAST
RI P OVER NETCOM ENABLE/ DI SABLE
RI P OVER ETHERNET ENABLE/ DI SABLE
RI P SEND STAT RTE ENABLE/ DI SABLE
RI P SEND DFLT RTE ENABLE/ DI SABLE
DYNAMI C ROUTI NG
ROUTE 1 ENABLE/ DI SABLE
...
ROUTE 10 ENABLE/ DI SABLE
STATI C ROUTES
DHCP SERVER ENABLE ENABLE/ DI SABLE
DHCP RANGE START XXX
DHCP RANGE END XXX
ENET DHCP SERVER
SYSTEM
TRI BUTARI ES
NETWORK MANAGEMENT
TI ME MANAGEMENT
RELAYS
EXTERNAL ALARMS
ORDERWI RE
G703/ V11 OPT 1/ 2
10BT/ 64K OPT 1/ 2
DATA CHANNEL
COMM PORT SETTI NGS
SECURI TY
ENABLE LOGI N ON/ OFF
CONFI GURATI ON
6- 12 Har r i s St r at ex Net w or k s
Chapt er 6. Sof t w ar e Menu Tr ee
Figure 6-13. The Configurat ion Branch cont inued
SYSTEM
TRI BUTARI ES
NETWORK MANAGEMENT
TI ME MANAGEMENT
RELAYS
EXTERNAL ALARMS
ORDERWI RE
G703/ V11 OPT 1/ 2
10BT/ 64K OPT 1/ 2
DATA CHANNEL
COMM PORT SETTI NGS
SECURI TY
ENABLE LOGI N ON/ OFF
CONFI GURATI ON
SET TI ME
RESET SECONDS
TI ME SYNC MODE FREE CLK/ SNTP/ NETCOM
PRI MARY SNTP SERV XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
SECOND. SNTP SERV XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
TI ME SERVER MODE DI SABLE/ SNTP/ NETCOM
SNTP+ NET
TI ME MANAGEMENT
CNTRL RELAY 1 OUT I NPUT-N
...
CNTRL RELAY 4 OUT I NPUT-N
OPT 1 RELAY 1 I NP I NPUT-N
...
OPT 1 RELAY 12 I NP I NPUT-N
OPT 2 RELAY 1 I NP I NPUT-N
...
OPT 2 RELAY 12 I NP I NPUT-N
RELAYS
4
4. See Relays & Ext ernal Alarms on page 5- 11 for a list of available relay input s.
CNTRL ALM CONDI TI ON
CNTRL ALM NAME
OPT 1 EXT MONI TOR
OPT 1 ALM CONDI TI ON
OPT 1 ALM NAME
OPT 2 EXT MONI TOR
OPT 2 ALM CONDI TI ON
OPT 2 ALM NAME
EXTERNAL ALARMS
4W ACTI VE CARD 1 ON/ OFF
GAI N LVL CARD 1 0/ 0dBm / -16/ 7dBm
4W ACTI VE CARD 2 ON/ OFF
GAI N LVL CARD 2 0/ 0dBm / -16/ 7dBm
ORDERWI RE
OPT n DEST NE DI SABLE/ 1-999
OPT n DEST SLOT NOT ALLOCATED/ 1/ 2
GV n I F TYPE G703/ V11
GV n CLK MODE CO DI RECT/ CONTRA DI RECT
GV n TX CLK EDGE RI SI NG/ FALLI NG
GV n RX CLK EDGE RI SI NG/ FALLI NG
G703/ V11 1, 2
OPT n DEST NE XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
OPT n DEST SLOT SLOT 1/ SLOT 2
10BT64K OPT 1,2
TI MEZONE -12: 00 TO + 13: 00
DAYLI GHT SAV ON/ OFF
LCL DATE YYYY-MM-DD
LCL TI ME HH: MM: SS
SET TI ME
LCL TI ME HH: MM: SS
RESET SECONDS
RESET SECONDS
CNTRL EXT ALM 1
CNTRL EXT ALM 2
CNTRL ALM CONDI TI ON
CNTRL EXT ALM 1
CNTRL EXT ALM 2
CNTRL ALM NAME
OPT 1/ 2 EXT ALM 0
...
OPT 1/ 2 EXT ALM 29
OPT 1/ 2 EXT ALM 0
...
OPT 1/ 2 EXT ALM 29
OPT 1/ 2 ALM NAME
OPT 1/ 2 ALM CONDI TI ON
I MN- 903003- E07 June 2008 6- 13
TRuepoi nt

5000 & 4040 Oper at or I nt er f ace


Figure 6-14. The Configurat ion Branch cont inued
SYSTEM
TRI BUTARI ES
NETWORK MANAGEMENT
TI ME MANAGEMENT
RELAYS
EXTERNAL ALARMS
ORDERWI RE
G703/ V11 OPT 1/ 2
10BT/ 64K OPT 1/ 2
DATA CHANNEL
COMM PORT SETTI NGS
SECURI TY
ENABLE LOGI N ON/ OFF
CONFI GURATI ON
DATA CHANNEL MODE BROADCAST/ PT TO PT
PT TO PT DESTI N 1 001...999/ 0: NONE
PT TO PT DESTI N 2 001...999/ 0: NONE
DATA CHANNEL
PORT 1 APP PPP/ SCAN/ DATA
PORT 1 PARI TY NONE/ ODD/ EVEN
PORT 1 CHAR LEN 5/ 6/ 7/ 8
PORT 1 SPEED 1200/ 2400/ 4800/ 9600
19200/ 38400/ 57600/ 115200
5
COMM PORT SETTI NGS
USER N
USER XXXXXXXX
PASSWORD XXXXXXXX
ACCESS PRI VI LEGE CHG PERMI / CHG CFG
/ MOD FI LES/ EXE CONTR/ READ ONLY
/ NO ACCESS
5. I f SCAN applicat ion, Port 1 char lengt h is not displayed. Port 1 baud rat e: DATA CHANNEL 1200...19200,
SCAN 1200...57600
SECURI TY
SECURI TY MODE BASI C/ STRONG
RADI US CLI ENT
ANTI LOGI N ATTACK
TLS/ SSL CI PHERS
LOCAL USERS
USER 1
...
USER 16
LOCAL USERS
RADI US ENABLE ENABLE/ DI SABLE
SERVER I P ADDR XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
SERVER PASSWORD XXXXXXXX
CACHE TI MEOUT 16-32 X
RADI US CLI ENT
ATTACK WI NDOW (MI N) 0-2880
ATTACK THRESHOLD 1-255
BLOCKOUT TI ME (SEC) 0-60
ANTI LOGI N ATTACK
TLS_RSA_AES_256
TLS_RSA_AES_128
SSL_RSA_3DES_EDE
SSL_RSA_DES
TLS_DHE_RSA_AES_256
TLS_DHE_RSA_AES_128
SSL_DHE_RSA_3DES_ED
SSL_DHE_RSA_DES
TLS/ SSL CI PHERS
6- 14 Har r i s St r at ex Net w or k s
Chapt er 6. Sof t w ar e Menu Tr ee
I MN- 903003- E07 June 2008 7- 1
Chapt er 7. Menu I t em Gl ossar y
The following menu item glossary lists many of the terms used in the Web-CIT and/ or
the hand held terminal.
For definit ions of alarms, please refer t o t he Glossary of Alarms in
Chapt er 5.
Ter m Def i ni t i on
ATPC BOOST STEP Allows for ent ering t he number of dB t hat t he t ransmit t er will
increase t he TX out put power by when allowed.
ATPC REMOTE RSL THRESHOLD Defines t he remot e ends receiver ATPC low t hreshold. The default
value is 5 dB. ( 5 dB above t he syst em t hreshold.)
AV Displays t he amount of t ime t hat t he signal was available over t he
elapsed t ime ( ET) period.
BANK LOAD VERSI ON Specifies t he version of t he soft ware load in a part icular soft ware
bank.
BANK SOFTWARE VERSI ON Specifies t he Soft ware/ Firmware version number of t he cards.
BBE Displays t he number of Background Block Errors over t he elapsed
t ime ( ET) period.
BBER Displays t he percent age of Background Block Errors Rat io over t he
elapsed t ime ( ET) period.
BER Displays t he Bit Error Rat e over t he elapsed t ime ( ET) period.
CHANNEL BANDWI DTH Allows for ent ering t he channel bandwidt h of t he syst em in MHz.
When changing t he USED CAPACI TY, t he CHANNEL BW may be
modified aut omat ically if t he current value becomes invalid.
CLK PRI ORI TY/ MUX CLK SOURCE Allows you t o set clock priorit ies for t he MUX.
CW TONE Allows you t o t urn t he Cont inuous Wave t one mode ON or OFF.
DANGEROUS CONTROL TI MEOUT Set s a t imeout period for cert ain commands. Some commands,
such as a loopback from t he remot e sit e, will disrupt t he syst em.
This set t ing set s t he t ime at which t he syst em will re- est ablish t he
link.
DATA CHANNEL MODE Allows t he user t o select bet ween broadcast or point t o point . I f
point t o point is select ed, t hen you also set dest inat ions.
DAYLI GHT SAV ( ADJUST) Turn on t o adj ust t he local clock set t ing by one hour if t he radio is
inst alled in a count ry where daylight savings t ime is observed.
DHCP RANGE Allows you t o ent er t he st art and end of t he server address range
when DHCP is enabled.
7- 2 Har r i s St r at ex Net w or k s
Chapt er 7. Menu I t em Gl ossar y
DUPLEX MODE Available for non 10/ 100BT capacit ies. Allows t he user t o define t he
syst em operat ion mode. I f t he DS3 duplex configurat ion is set t o
SI MPLEX TX on one end of a hop, it must be set t o SI MPLEX RX at
t he ot her end of t he hop.
EFS Displays t he number of error free seconds over t he elapsed t ime
( ET) period.
EFSR Displays t he percent age of error free seconds over t he elapsed t ime
( ET) period.
ELAPSE ( TI ME) Displays t he elapsed t ime when using ATPC or DTPC mode.
ELAPSED TI ME Displays t he elapsed t ime over which t he BER measurement is
comput ed.
ENABLE LOGI N Allows for t urning login capabilit ies ON or OFF.
ES Displays t he number of errored seconds over t he elapsed t ime ( ET)
period.
ESR Displays t he percent age of errored seconds over t he elapsed t ime
( ET) period.
ET Displays t he t ime elapsed since t he BER calculat or was last reset ( in
ERR SEC) or bet ween last t wo reset s ( in LATCH ERR SEC) .
ETHERNET I P ADDR MODE Allows for select ing Aut o, DHCP, or manual for t he et hernet I P
addressing mode. I n Aut o mode, t he I P address of t he et hernet
int erface is derived from t he NE ADDRESS.
EXTERNAL CLOCK S1 BYTE Allows you t o specify a synchronizat ion qualit y level for t he t iming
reference of t he ext ernal clock input 1.
FI RMWARE UPGRADE Execut es t he command t o upgrade t he firmware wit h t he new
soft ware load.
GET COMMUNI TY Set s t he SNMP Get Communit y name. The SNMP Manager needs t o
use t he same name t o read informat ion from t he radio.
H/ W KEY Displays t he t ype of hardware key at t ached t o t he MUX.
LI NK I D Allows you t o set t he link I D as a value from 0 t o 99. When t he link
I D received from a remot e st at ion is different from t he local link I D,
t he link I D alarm is set and MUX A and MUX B will insert AI S at t he
t ribut ary out put t o lock up t he unwant ed t ransmit t er.
LNA RSL Displays t he RSL in dBm measured at t he input of t he low noise
amplifier.
LOCK RX DADE/ DEMUX Allows you t o SET or CLEAR t he lock on t he RXD/ DMUX.
LOCK RX DECODER Allows you t o SET or CLEAR t he lock on t he RA/ DECDR
LOCK TX MUX Allows you t o SET or CLEAR t he lock on t he TX MUX.
LOCK TX OUT Allows you t o SET or CLEAR t he lock on t he TXs out put power.
MAX EXCEED % Allows for ent ering t he maximum exceeding t ime percent age t hat
t he out put power is above t he TX coordinat ed at t enuat ion. This is
available only if t he TPC mode is set t o ATPC or DTPC.
Ter m Def i ni t i on
I MN- 903003- E07 June 2008 7- 3
TRuepoi nt

5000 & 4040 Oper at or I nt er f ace


MEASUREMENT/ RUN Allows you t o RUN a new BER calculat ion and t o STOP it .
MUX PAYLOAD SCRAMBLI NG Allows you t o enable or disable scrambling for OC- 3/ STM1 MUXes.
SONET opt ical int erface signals use binary line coding and t herefore
must be scrambled t o assure an adequat e number of t ransit ions ( 0s
t o 1s and 1s t o 0s) for such purposes as line rat e clock recovery at
t he receiver.
MUX RX TUG3 SELECT Allows you t o decide which TUG- 3 ( 55 Mb/ s) from t he STM1 signal
( 155 Mb/ s) is select ed t o be t ransmit t ed in t he air.
MUX TX TUG3 SELECT Allows you t o decide which TUG- 3 ( 55 Mb/ s) should be used in t he
STM1 signal ( 155 Mb/ s) t o t ransmit t he signal received from t he air.
MUX TRAFFI C MODE Select SPLI T DUAL MUX for 32E1. When you change t he t raffic
mode from Single Mux t o Split Dual Mux or vice versa, you should
always reboot t he Cont roller soft ware.
NETCOM I P ADDR MODE Allows for select ing Aut o or Manual for t he Net com I P addressing
mode. I n Aut o mode, t he I P address of t he Net com int erface is
derived from t he NE ADDRESS.
NETCOM I P MTU SI ZE Specifies t he I P over Net com MTU size as eit her 236 or 1500 byt es.
The value of t he Net com I P MTU Size must be t he same for all
radios in t he Net com net work; 236 is t he default value for backward
compat ibilit y.
NETCOM OVER ETHERNET Allows for enabling or disabling t he Net com I P t raffic t o run over t he
Et hernet .
NETCOM OVER HDLC Allows for enabling or disabling t he Net com I P t raffic t o run over t he
HDLC link.
NOMI NAL REMOTE RSL Available in DTPC mode only. Allows for set t ing t he nominal remot e
RSL which t he t ransmit t er t hen compares t o received remot e RSL.
OPT N DEST NE Allows you t o set t he dest inat ion for t he dat a being sent t hrough
t he circuit emulat ion t unnel t o a specific NE.
OPT N DEST SLOT Allows you t o allocat e a slot for t he dat a being sent t hrough t he
circuit emulat ion t unnel.
PA TX POWER Displays t he t ransmit signals power at t he power amplifier.
PDH CLOCK S1 BYTE Allows you t o specify a synchronizat ion qualit y level for t he t iming
reference derived from PDH ( E1) incoming signal.
PORT 1 APPLI CATI ON Set s t he applicat ion ( PPP, SCAN, or DATA) for Port 1.
PORT 1 BAUD RATE/ SPEED Set s t he baud rat e ( 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400,
57600, 115200) for Port 1.
PORT 1 CHAR LENGTH Set s t he charact er lengt h for Port 1 at 5, 6, 7, or 8.
PORT 1 PARI TY Set s t he parit y mode for Port 1 at None, Odd, or Even.
PORT DUPLEX Available on MUXes wit h Et hernet . I f t he Et hernet port
Aut onegot iat ion is Disabled, t his allows you t o set t he Et hernet port
t o eit her full duplex or half duplex.
Ter m Def i ni t i on
7- 4 Har r i s St r at ex Net w or k s
Chapt er 7. Menu I t em Gl ossar y
PORT SEGREGATI ON Allows you t o ENABLE or DI SABLE t he abilit y t o segregat e t he
Et hernet t raffic from different port s on t o different t ime slot s.
PORT SPEED Available on MUXes wit h Et hernet . I f t he Et hernet port
Aut onegot iat ion is Disabled, t his allows you t o set t he Et hernet port
speed.
RCS DELAY Allows for select ing how fast t he Reverse Channel Swit ching act ion
will st art aft er receiving a Remot e Sync Loss alarm. This feat ure is
available only wit h a MHSB or Space Diversit y prot ect ed syst em.
RCS MODE Allows for select ing t he Reverse Channel Swit ching mode; choices
are Smart , Simple, or Disabled. This feat ure is available only wit h
a MHSB or Space Diversit y prot ect ed syst em.
REF RSL Displays t he RSL in dBm at t he specified reference point .
REF TX POWER Displays t he reference point s t ransmit signal power.
RESET STATI STI CS Allows you t o reset t he syst em error performance numbers. The
numbers present in t he ERR SEC menu are copied in t he LATCH ERR
SEC menu.
RESET TPC STATI STI C Allows you t o reset t he TPC st at ist ics.
RFU DOWNLOAD Displays t he percent age complet e of a RFU download.
RI P MODE I ndicat es t he RI P mode, which may be DI SABLED or RI P- 2 BROADCAST
or RI P- 2 MULTI CAST.
RI P OVER ETHERNET I ndicat es whet her RI P is enabled or disabled over t he Et hernet
int erface.
RI P OVER NETCOM I ndicat es whet her RI P is enabled or disabled over t he Net comm
int erface.
RSL STATUS Displays whet her t he RSL is OK or LOW. This st at us is available
when t he RSL Low Severit y configurat ion is set t o St at us.
RSSI OUTPUT POLARI TY
A
Allows for set t ing t he RSSI out put polarit y as proport ional t o RSL or
inversely proport ional t o RSL.
RX ACU LOSS Allows for ent ering, in t ent h of a dB, t he t ot al loss of ext ra component s t hat
are inst alled on t he received signal pat h bet ween t he LNA port and t he
reference point at which t he user would like t o see t he RSL value.
SECURI TY LEVEL Displays t he level of encrypt ion used by t he soft ware as eit her
Medium or High.
SEP Displays t he number of severely errored periods over t he elapsed
t ime ( ET) period.
SEPI Displays t he severely errored period int ensit y over t he elapsed t ime
( ET) period.
SES Displays t he number of severely errored seconds over t he elapsed
t ime ( ET) period.
SESR Displays t he percent age of severely errored seconds over t he
elapsed t ime ( ET) period.
Ter m Def i ni t i on
I MN- 903003- E07 June 2008 7- 5
TRuepoi nt

5000 & 4040 Oper at or I nt er f ace


SET COMMUNI TY Set s t he SNMP Set Communit y name. The SNMP manager needs t o
use t he same name t o change t he informat ion on t he radio.
SOFTWARE FEATURE/ SW KEYS Displays t he t ypes of soft ware keys and if a part icular soft ware key
is available or unavailable.
SOFTWARE REBOOT
( I MMEDI ATE)
I mmediat ely reboot s t he syst em. I t ' s a cold reboot of t he syst em
which will affect t raffic. The soft ware loaded upon reboot will come
from t he primary soft ware bank.
SOFTWARE UPGRADE/ RUN ALT
SOFTWARE
Reboot s t he cont roller card and forces t he execut ion of t he soft ware
version st ored in t he alt ernat e bank. The RFU soft ware and SPU
firmware are not reloaded.
SYS PROTECTI ON Configures t he radio for t he following operat ions: Unprot ect ed,
Monit ored Hot St andby, Frequency Diversit y, Space Diversit y, or
Frequency Diversit y wit h Space Diversit y.
SYSTEM CAPABI LI TY Displays t he maximum capacit y of t he syst em. See Capacit y.
SYSTEM UPGRADE/ RUN ALT
SYSTEM
Reboot s t he syst em and forces t he usage of t he load st ored in t he
alt ernat e bank. The SPU soft ware, RFU soft ware, and t he SPU
firmware are all affect ed.
TI ME SERVER MODE/ ENABLE
RADI O AS TI ME SERVER
Allows you t o select which t ime server you want t o use: Disable
( none) , SNTP, Net com, or SNTP and Net com.
TI ME SYNC MODE Allows you t o select t he t ime synchronizat ion mode: SNTP, Net com,
or a free running clock.
TI ME ZONE Allows you t o set t he difference bet ween t he local radios t ime and
GMT.
TI MI NG CLOCK Displays t he t ype of t iming clock as one of t he following:
THROUGH/ LOCAL/ EXTI NP1/ EXTI NP2/ PDH/ SPUR/ EAST/ WEST.
TPC EXCEED Displays t he percent age of t ime t he radio was operat ing above t he
coordinat ed TX out put power level.
TPC MODE
B
Allows for set t ing t he TPC mode t o Manual, ATPC, or DTPC.
TRAP COMMUNI TY Allows for ent ering t he SNMP t rap communit y name up t o 20
charact ers.
TRI BUTARY CODE Allows t he operat or t o set t he code for a given t ribut ary. Appears
in NxDS1, 28DS1 or 28DS1+ WS capacit y syst ems.
TRI BUTARY EQUALI ZER Allows t he operat or t o set t he equalizer value for a given t ribut ary.
Appears in NxDS1, 28DS1, 28DS1+ WS, DS3, or 3DS3+ 3WS
capacit y syst ems.
TRI BUTARY FRAMI NG Allows you t o set framing at M1- 3 asynchronous or C- bit parit y.
Available for 28DS1, 28DS1+ WS, or DS3 capacit ies.
TRI BUTARY MODE Allows t he operat or t o set t he mode for a given t ribut ary.
TX ACU LOSS
C
Allows for ent ering, in t ent h of a dB, t he t ot al loss of ext ra
component s t hat are inst alled on t he t ransmit t ing signal pat h
bet ween t he PA port and t he reference point at which t he user
would like t o see t he TX out put power value.
Ter m Def i ni t i on
7- 6 Har r i s St r at ex Net w or k s
Chapt er 7. Menu I t em Gl ossar y
TX COORD ATTEN Allows t he operat or t o set t he coordinat ed at t enuat ion anywhere
from 0- 25 dB. The TPC mode must be ATPC or DTPC for t his
feat ure. Some count ries require t he radio t o st ay below t his level
t he maj orit y of t he t ime.
TX MUTE
D
Allows you t o mut e t he RFU using ON or OFF. The default is OFF.
TX REVERT TO A Available when RCS mode is disabled. See Transmit t er Swit ching
on page 3- 36.
TX STAT ATTEN Allows t he operat or t o set t he st at ic at t enuat ion anywhere from
0- 30 dB in 0. 5 increment s. I f you have a TR4040 23 GHz QPSK, t he
at t enuat ion should be set no higher t han 24dB.
UNAV Displays t he amount of t ime t hat t he signal was unavailable over
t he elapsed t ime ( ET) period.
UNAVR Displays t he percent age of t ime t hat t he signal was unavailable
over t he elapsed t ime ( ET) period.
UPGRADE RFU Execut es t he command t o upgrade t he RFU soft ware t o t he version
compat ible wit h t he current SPU soft ware version.
USED CAPACI TY Allows you t o change your syst ems capacit y t o use all or part of t he
maximum syst em capabilit y. See Capacit y on page 3- 15.
WAYSI DE CODE Available if syst em capabilit y is OC3 ( DS1) , 3DS3+ 3WS,
28DS1+ WS, 100BT+ DS1, DS3+ DS1, or E3+ E1. Allows for set t ing
t he wayside code as eit her AMI or B8ZS.
WAYSI DE EQUALI ZER Available if syst em capabilit y is OC3 ( DS1) , 3DS3+ 3WS,
28DS1+ WS, 100BT+ DS1, or DS3+ DS1. Allows t he operat or t o set
t he equalizer value for t he wayside channel.
WAYSI DE MODE Available if syst em capabilit y is OC3 only. Allows for set t ing t he
mode of t he wayside channel.
WAYSI DE TERMI NATI ON Available only when t he maximum capacit y of t he syst em is OC3
and t he Wayside mode is E1. Select E1 unbalanced ( 75 ohms) if
using a BNC cable or E1 balanced ( 120 ohms) if using a RJ- 45 cable.
a. For more informat ion, please refer t o Fine align t he ant enna in t he SPU I nst allat ion manual,
I MN- 903003- Exx.
b. When t he Transmit Power Cont rol is set as ATPC, and t here is fading of t he receive signal of t he online
channel, soft ware version 1. 1.x and 2.0.x always boost s out put power of BOTH t ransmit t ers. Manual mode
and DTPC mode allow each t ransmit t er t o be adj ust ed independent ly.
c. Losses include RF branching, coupling, filt ers, or diplexer losses in t he t ransmit and receive direct ions,
bet ween t he radio ant enna port and t he t ransceiver. The measured t ransmit t er power minus t he supplied
ACU loss value give t he best indicat ion of t he power int o t he t ransmit ant enna.
d. When you use t he Web- CI T t o perform a TX mut e, a Dangerous Cont rol Timeout will occur clearing t he TX
mut e if ot her loopbacks are performed using t he Web- CI T. I f you set t he TX mut e t ime- out t o 0, no t ime- out
will occur. This is only t he case when performing TX mut es and loopbacks at t he same t ime using t he
Web- CI T. This does not apply t o t he HHT.
Ter m Def i ni t i on
I MN- 903003- E07 June 2008 8- 1
Chapt er 8. Gl ossar y
This chapt er provides an expanded descript ion ( as appropriat e) of most
of t he acronyms used in t his manual.
ACU
Ant enna Coupling Unit
ADM
Add/ Drop Mult iplexer A Digit al mult iplexing equipment t hat adds/ removes
individual signals t o/ from a collect ion of mult iplexed signals in a net work.
AGC
Aut omat ic Gain Cont rol
AI S
Alarm I ndicat ion Signal I n a DS1 syst em, a t ransmit t ed all- ones signal
replacing t he normal signal t o maint ain t ransmission cont inuit y indicat ing t o t he
receive t erminal t hat t here is a t ransmission fault locat ed eit her at , or upst ream
from, t he t ransmit t ing t erminal.
AI S- L
Line Alarm I ndicat ion Signal
AMI
Alt ernat e Mark I nversion
ARP
Address Resolut ion Prot ocol
ATM
Asynchronous Transfer Mode A dedicat ed connect ion swit ching t echnology
t hat organizes digit al dat a int o 53- byt e cell unit s and t ransmit s t hem over a
physical medium using digit al signal t echnology. Relat ive t o ot her relat ed cells,
each cell is processed asynchronously and queued before being mult iplexed over
t he t ransmission pat h.
ATPC
Aut omat ic Transmit Power Cont rol A feat ure of digit al microwave radio
equipment t hat adj ust s t he t ransmit t er out put power based on pat h fading
det ect ed at t he receiver.
B1
Bit I nt erleaved Parit y- 8 ( BI P- 8) An RSOH byt e for error checking t he
complet e STM- 1 signal at t he end of a regenerat or sect ion.
B2
Bit I nt erleaved Parit y- 24 ( BI P- 24) MSOH byt es for error checking an STM- 1
signal ( minus t he RSOH) at t he end of t he mult iplexer sect ion.
B8ZS
Bipolar 8 Zero Subst it ut ion
CLEC
Compet it ive Local Exchange Carrier A service provider t hat builds and
operat es communicat ion net works in met ropolit an areas, t hus providing
cust omers wit h an alt ernat ive t o local t elephone companies.
Compact
Fl ash

A compact , removable st andard for st oring and ret rieving digit al informat ion in
small, low- power devices. Such cards use flash t echnology for reusable
recording, and ROM t echnology for read- only applicat ions. Replaces t he MMC
( Mult i Media Card) , as of Product Release 6. 0
8- 2 Har r i s St r at ex Net w or k s
Chapt er 8. Gl ossar y
CTU
Configurat ion Transfer Ut ilit y A Harris St rat ex Net works propriet ary soft ware
ut ilit y for t ransferring t he configurat ion dat a of t he radio from a Version 1
Cont roller t o a Version 2 Cont roller or vice versa.
DADE
Different ial Absolut e Delay Equalizat ion An adj ust ment t o render a prot ect ed
syst em hit less.
DHCP
Dynamic Host Configurat ion Prot ocol
DTPC
Dynamic Transmit Power Cont rol A feat ure enabling t he regulat ion of a t arget
receive signal level by remot ely and proport ionally cont rolling t he corresponding
t ransmit t er out put power level.
ESCAN
Ext ended SCAN Prot ocol A Harris St rat ex Net works propriet ary prot ocol t hat
is more efficient and allows for fast er communicat ions t han t he SCAN prot ocol,
also from Harris St rat ex Net works.
FD
Frequency Diversit y
FEC
Forward Error Correct ion A communicat ion t echnique t hat compensat es for a
noisy t ransmission channel by sending, along wit h t he primary dat a payload,
addit ional informat ion t o correct for errors t hat occur in t ransmission.
FI R
Finit e I mpulse Response filt er Designat es one of t wo primary t ypes of digit al
filt ers used in Digit al Signal Processing applicat ions.
FTP
File Transfer Prot ocol
HDB3
High Densit y Bipolar order 3
HDLC
High- level Dat a Link Cont rol A bit - orient ed synchronous dat a link layer
prot ocol developed by I SO. HDLC specifies a dat a encapsulat ion met hod on
synchronous serial links using frame charact ers and checksums.
HHT
Hand- held t erminal A Harris St rat ex Net works user int erface device ( also
known as a display keypad) . I t allows t he user t o configure and monit or t he
radio when not using CI T or Web- CI T.
I DU
I ndoor Unit Apiece of equipment locat ed inside t he users locat ion.
I F
I nt ermediat e Frequency
I P
I nt ernet Prot ocol A met hod or prot ocol by which dat a is sent from one
comput er t o anot her on t he I nt ernet .
K1 and K2
I n an SDH syst em, K1 and K2 are MSOH byt es used for
cont rolling t he mult iplexer sect ion prot ect ion swit ching,
signalling Alarm I ndicat ion Signal ( AI S) , Far End Remot e Failure ( FERF) , and
signalling Aut omat ic Prot ect ion Swit ching ( APS) alarms, when implement ed.
LAN
Local- area Net work A dat a net work locat ed on a user' s premises wit hin a
limit ed geographical area. Widely used t echnology st andards in LANs are
Et hernet , FDDI , and Token Ring.
I MN- 903003- E07 June 2008 8- 3
TRuepoi nt

5000 & 4040 Oper at or I nt er f ace


LOH
Line Overhead Cont ains t he media' s framing, rout ing prot ocol, and
net work- layer prot ocol overhead.
MHSB
Monit ored Hot St andby
MMC
Mult iMediaCard A compact , removable st andard for st oring and ret rieving
digit al informat ion in small, low- power devices. Mult iMediaCards use flash
t echnology for reusable recording, and ROM t echnology for read- only
applicat ions.
MSOH
Mult iplexer Sect ion Overhead As part of an SDH frame ( mult iplexer) , refers
t o t he processing t ime required by codes for error checking and cont rol of
t ransmissions.
MSUU
Microwave Soft ware Upgrade Ut ilit y A Harris St rat ex Net works propriet ary
soft ware ut ilit y for upgrading t he soft ware and firmware of t he TRuepoint


radios. Uses Microsoft Windows 2000

Service Pack 4 or lat er.


MTBF
Mean Time Bet ween Failures The average t ime ( usually expressed in hours)
in which a component operat es wit hout failure. I t is calculat ed by dividing t he
t ot al number of failures int o t he t ot al number of operat ing hours observed.
MTBO
Mean TI me Bet ween Out ages A funct ion of MTBF, MTTR and t he probabilit y
t hat t he monit oring circuit s det ect a fail ure. The only circuit s considered in t he
MTBO calculat ions are t he ones t hat impact t raffic.
MTR
Mean Time To Rest ore
MTTR
Mean Time To Recovery The average t ime ( usually expressed in minut es) t hat
a device will t ake t o recover from a non- t erminal failure.
MUX
Mult iplexer A circuit ry t hat combines t wo or more informat ion- carrying
channels for t ransmission over one channel, by using frequency division or t ime
division t echniques
NMS
Net work Management Syst em such as Harris St rat ex Net works FarScan.
OC- n
Opt ical Carrier Level n The opt ical signal t hat result s from an opt ical
conversion of a synchronous t ransport signal n ( < hypert ext - t able> STS- n) . This
is t he signal t hat will form t he basis of t he int erface.
ODU
Out door Unit Refer t o RFU, described below.
OMM
Opt ical Mult imode
OSM
Opt ical Single Mode
PCR
Paperless Chart Recorder A soft ware based diagnost ic t ool t hat st ores
operat ional dat a from a remot e radio and provides view capabilit y t o t he user.
PDH
Plesiosynchronous Digit al Hierarchy A complex mult iplexing scheme of bit
st uffing and byt e int erleaving. I t mult iplexes t he lower level 64 kbit / s circuit s
int o a successively higher order 2 Mbit / s, 34 Mbit / s, 140 Mbit / s and 565 Mbit / s
aggregat e rat es.
8- 4 Har r i s St r at ex Net w or k s
Chapt er 8. Gl ossar y
PPP
Point - t o- Point Prot ocol A TCP/ I P rout ing prot ocol t hat allows communicat ions
over serial communicat ions lines wit hout t he use of ot her adapt ers, such as
modems.
QAM
Quadrat ure Amplit ude Modulat ion A met hod of combining t wo
amplit ude- modulat ed signals int o a single channel, t hereby doubling t he
effect ive bandwidt h.
QPSK
Quadrat ure Phase Shift Keying A digit al frequency modulat ion t echnique used
for sending dat a over coaxial cable net works.
RDI - L
Remot e Defect I ndicat ion - Line
RCS
Reverse Channel Swit ching A rich feat ure set t hat provides prot ect ion against
pot ent ial far- end t ransmit t er silent failure.
Rest r i ct ed
Ar ea
A locat ion qualified in accordance wit h I EC St andard 60950- 1 as providing an
access t hat can only be gained by Skilled Persons or users who have been
inst ruct ed about t he reasons for t he rest rict ion applied t o t he locat ion and
about any precaut ions t o be t aken; and
access achieved t hrough t he use of a Tool, lock and key, or ot her means of
securit y, and is cont rolled by t he aut horit y responsible for t he locat ion.
RFCOH
Radio Frame Complement ary Overhead Refers t o dat a t hat is added t o a dat a
t ransmission unit , ( such as Net com dat a packet s) .
RFU
Radio Frequency Unit The radio unit t hat is inst alled mainly out doors.
RI P
Rout ing I nformat ion Prot ocol
RMS
Rack Mount ing Space
RPC
Radio Processing Card
RS
Revert ive Swit ching A process t hat sends t raffic back t o t he original working
card aft er t he card ret urns online.
RSL
Received Signal Level
RSOH
Regenerat or Sect ion Overhead As part of an SDH frame ( regenerat or) , refers
t o t he processing t ime required by codes for error checking and cont rol of
t ransmissions.
RSSI
Received Signal St rengt h I ndicat or A paramet er ret urned from a t ransceiver
t hat gives a measure of t he RF signal st rengt h, eit her uplink or downlink.
SD
Space Diversit y
SDH
Synchronous Digit al Hierarchy An int ernat ional st andard for synchronous
dat a t ransmission on opt ical media. SDH uses a mult iplexing st ruct ure t hat
enables direct access t o individual 2 Mbit / s dat a st reams from wit hin t he higher
order aggregat e line signals, which lays t he foundat ion for benefit s of dist ribut ed
t raffic swit ching and prot ect ion.
I MN- 903003- E07 June 2008 8- 5
TRuepoi nt

5000 & 4040 Oper at or I nt er f ace


SDLC
Synchronous Dat a Link Cont rol A bit - orient ed, full- duplex serial prot ocol t hat
has spawned numerous similar prot ocols, including HDLC and LAPB.
SDM
Signal Dist ribut ion Module An opt ional module used in conj unct ion wit h a
redundant mult iplexer, as part of t he prot ect ion unit t hat is int egrat ed wit h t he
SPU.
Sk i l l ed
Per son
A sk i l l ed per son is considered t o have t he necessary knowledge and pract ical
experience of elect rical and radio engineering t o appreciat e t he various hazards
t hat can arise from working on radio t ransceivers, and t akes appropriat e
precaut ions t o ensure t he safet y of personnel.
This individual is considered t o be a sk i l l ed per son only if he/ she is compet ent
t o t ake responsibilit y for bot h his/ her safet y and for t hat of unskilled personnel
under his/ her immediat e supervision, when working on t he t ransceiver.
Training requirement s for a sk i l l ed per son should not only be confined t o
t echnical mat t ers and, preferably, should include first - aid t reat ment , especially
met hods of art ificial resuscit at ion: respirat ion and cardiac compression ( heart
massage) .
SNCP
Subnet work Connect ion Prot ect ion Designat es pat h- swit ched SDH rings t hat
employ redundant , fiber- opt ic t ransmission facilit ies. Organized in pairs, one
fiber t ransmit s in one direct ion while t he backup fiber t ransmit s in t he ot her. I f
t he primary ring fails, t he backup t akes over.
SNMP
Simple Net work Management Prot ocol Prot ocol used t o facilit at e net work
management by exchanging informat ion bet ween equipment on a net work.
SONET
Synchronous Opt ical Net work An ANSI st andard for synchronous dat a
t ransmission on opt ical media t hat is t he equivalent of < hypert ext - t able> SDH,
described above.
SPU
Signal Processing Unit ( Also referred t o as I DU) The indoor rack- mount ed unit
t hat cont ains plug- in modules for handling and processing t he signal received
from t he RFU.
STM- n
Synchronous Transport Module A dat a unit t ransmit t ed wit hin a fixed t ime slot
of 125 s, also known as frame. < hypert ext - t able> SDH t ransport defines a
range of frames, STM- 1. . . STM- 64, each corresponding t o a part icular
t ransmission rat e, such as STM- 1 ( 155 Mbit / s) , STM- 4 ( 622 Mbit / s) , STM- 16
( 2. 5 Gbit / s) , and STM- 64 ( 10 Gbit / s) .
STS- n
Synchronous Transport Signal, Level n The basic logical building block signal
of a < hypert ext - t able> SONET. The STS- 1 ( level 1) signal has a rat e of 51. 840
Mbit / s. The int ernat ional equivalent of t his rat e is t he STM.
TCM
Trellis- Coded Modulat ion A bandwidt h- efficient scheme t hat combines
error- correct ion coding wit h modulat ion. The redundancy t hus int roduced by t he
coding does not expand t he bandwidt h, since t he parit y bit s are absorbed by t he
ext ended signal const ellat ion. Two- dimensional ( 2D) TCM uses dependency
bet ween in- phase and quadrat ure symbols, while four- dimensional ( 4D) TCM
int roduces dependency bet ween symbols of t wo successive int ervals.
8- 6 Har r i s St r at ex Net w or k s
Chapt er 8. Gl ossar y
TCP/ I P
Transmission Cont rol Prot ocol/ I nt ernet Prot ocol A st andard t hat provides
connect ivit y across comput er plat forms ranging from mainframes t o
Macint oshes. These comput ers can exchange dat a when connect ed over a
compat ible net work scheme, such as Et hernet or X. 25. Originally developed by
t he Depart ment of Defense in t he 70s, t hese prot ocols are now a de fact o
indust ry st andard.
UDP
User Dat agram Prot ocol A TCP/ I P prot ocol t hat describes how messages reach
applicat ion programs wit hin a dest inat ion comput er.
WAN
Wide- area Net work A net work t hat provides t elecommunicat ion services t o a
geographic area larger t han t hat served by a local area net work or a
met ropolit an area net work.
Web- CI T
Web- Craft I nt erface Tool A Harris St rat ex Net works propriet ary soft ware
ut ilit y for monit oring and cont rolling t he operat ion and configurat ion of t he
TRuepoint

radios. Locat ed on t he TRuepoint

Cont roller, any of t he t wo


NTWRK/ LAN port s allows for connect ing a PC running t he Web- CI T server t hat
is embedded in t he radio. This web server st ores HTML pages and applet s t hat
provide a user int erface for monit oring and cont rolling any TRuepoint

Net work
Element , using Microsoft

I nt ernet Explorer, version 6. 0 and lat er or Mozilla


Firefox 1. 5 and lat er.
I MN- 903003- E07 June 2008 A- 1
Appendi x A. Nx E1/ DS1+ 2x 10/
100BASE- T MUX Set - Up
Thi s Appendi x appl i es t o t he TR5000 onl y .
Har dw ar e
For more information on any of the steps or parts herein, refer to the SPU Installation
Manual, IMN-903002-Exx.
Figure A-1. Mult iplexer, N- 16 E1/ DS1 + 2x10/ 100BASE-T
Pr ocedur e
1. If replacing the MUX, disconnect all tributary cables from their respective ports on
the MUX to replace.
2. With both thumbs, pull down on the Ext ract or Levers until the EMI Gasket
clears the cavity, then grasp the module with both hands and pull it out to free it
from the enclosure. Remember to remove the hardware key, if present, and keep it
in a safe place for reuse.
Model : MUX 902582, Opt . 502 ( DS1)
Model : MUX 902582, Opt . 511 ( E1)
Ex t r act or s
( 2 Ty pi cal )
Por t 1, 10/
100BASE-T
Tr i but ar i es, 1- 8 I n/ Out
refer t o Table A- 1.
Tr i but ar i es 9- 16, I n/ Out
( refer t o Table A- 4)
Por t 2, 10/ 100BASE-T,
( r efer t o Table A- 5)
Traffic
Mux
LEDs
A- 2 Har r i s St r at ex Net w or k s

Figure A-2. Removing a MUX Module
3. Replace the module with the new NxE1/ DS1+2x10/ 100 Base-T MUX. If you have
the V2 Controller, you will need to install a software key to use the full capacity of
the MUX; see Soft ware Key on page 4- 16 for more information. If you do not
have a software key, the default capacity will be 2E1/ 4DS1.
4. Align the new module card in the cavitys slide rails. Before completely inserting the
module, apply a firm d ow n w a r d pressure on its face plate to ensure that the EMI
Gasket remains en t i r ely inside the cavitys top edge. Latch the module in place
by pushing up on both extractor levers until they bottom.
5. LEDs on the new MUX will light up Red during initialization, then turn Green,
indicating proper operation.
6. Reconnect all tributary cables (D-Type) to their respective ports on the module.
If installing for the first time, connect the D-Type connectors to the TRIBUTARIES
(1-8) and TRIBUTARIES (9-16) ports on the balanced SPU. At the other end, install
your own connector or wire-wrap the bare wires to your equipment. A label at the
users end of the cable indicates which tributaries the bare wires connect to.
Table A-1. MUX Tribut ary Cables
Table A-2. SDM Tribut ary Cables
Par t Number Descr i pt i on Lengt h
087- 903887- 001 Cable, for connect ing MUX t o cust omer
t ribut aries, D- Type male 50- pin,
st raight connect or one end, st ub- end
t o cust omer side
3 ft ( 0.915 m)
087- 903887- 002 7 ft ( 2. 14 m)
087- 903887- 003 19 ft ( 5. 8 m)
087- 903887- 004 25 ft ( 7. 625 m)
Par t Number Descr i pt i on Lengt h
098- 903469- 001 Cable Kit , for connect ing SDM t o
cust omer t ribut aries, D- Type male
50- pin, right - angle connect or one end,
st ub- end t o cust omer
32. 5 ft ( 9. 91 m)
098- 903469- 002 10 ft ( 3. 05 m)
098- 903469- 003 20 ft ( 6. 10 m)
EMI Gasket
Enlarged
Ext ract or Levers
I MN- 903003- E07 June 2008 A- 3
TRuepoi nt

5000 & 4040 Oper at or I nt er f ace


Table A-3. Balanced Tribut aries 1- 9 50- Pin Female SCSI
Pi n Name Di r . Descr i pt i on
1 P1_NC1 - No Connect ion
2 GND - Ground
3 RxRI NG8 Out Tribut ary 8 Rx Out put Ring
4 TxRI NG8 I n Tribut ary 8 Tx I nput Ring
5 GND - Ground
6 RxRI NG7 Out Tribut ary 7 Rx Out put Ring
7 TxRI NG7 I n Tribut ary 7 Tx I nput Ring
8 GND - Ground
9 RxRI NG6 Out Tribut ary 6 Rx Out put Ring
10 TxRI NG6 I n Tribut ary 6 Tx I nput Ring
11 GND - Ground
12 RxRI NG5 Out Tribut ary 5 Rx Out put Ring
13 TxRI NG5 I n Tribut ary 5 Tx I nput Ring
14 GND - Ground
15 RxRI NG4 Out Tribut ary 4 Rx Out put Ring
16 TxRI NG4 I n Tribut ary 4 Tx I nput Ring
17 GND - Ground
18 RxRI NG3 Out Tribut ary 3 Rx Out put Ring
19 TxRI NG3 I n Tribut ary 3 Tx I nput Ring
20 GND - Ground
21 RxRI NG2 Out Tribut ary 2 Rx Out put Ring
22 TxRI NG2 I n Tribut ary 2 Tx I nput Ring
23 GND - Ground
24 RxRI NG1 Out Tribut ary 1 Rx Out put Ring
25 TxRI NG1 I n Tribut ary 1 Tx I nput Ring
Pin 50
SCSI - 2 Used on:
MUX 902582, Opt ions 502/
503/ 511 Mixed Mode
NxDS1/ E1 + 2x10/ 100BASE- T
Pin 26
Pin 1
D- Type Used on:
SDM 902593, Opt ions 502/
503 paired wit h MUX 902582,
Opt ions 502/ 503
Pin 26
Pin 50
Pin 1
A- 4 Har r i s St r at ex Net w or k s

26 P1_NC2 - No Connect ion
27 GND - Ground
28 RxTI P8 Out Tribut ary 8 Rx Out put Tip
29 TxTI P8 I n Tribut ary 8 Tx I nput Tip
30 GND - Ground
31 RxTI P7 Out Tribut ary 7 Rx Out put Tip
32 TxTI P7 I n Tribut ary 7 Tx I nput Tip
33 GND - Ground
34 RxTI P6 Out Tribut ary 6 Rx Out put Tip
35 TxTI P6 I n Tribut ary 6 Tx I nput Tip
36 GND - Ground
37 RxTI P5 Out Tribut ary 5 Rx Out put Tip
38 TxTI P5 I n Tribut ary 5 Tx I nput Tip
39 GND - Ground
40 RxTI P4 Out Tribut ary 4 Rx Out put Tip
41 TxTI P4 I n Tribut ary 4 Tx I nput Tip
42 GND - Ground
43 RxTI P3 Out Tribut ary 3 Rx Out put Tip
44 TxTI P3 I n Tribut ary 3 Tx I nput Tip
45 GND - Ground
46 RxTI P2 Out Tribut ary 2 Rx Out put Tip
47 TxTI P2 I n Tribut ary 2 Tx I nput Tip
48 GND - Ground
49 RxTI P1 Out Tribut ary 1 Rx Out put Tip
50 TxTI P1 I n Tribut ary 1 Tx I nput Tip
Pi n Name Di r . Descr i pt i on
Pin 50
SCSI - 2 Used on:
MUX 902582, Opt ions 502/
503/ 511 Mixed Mode
NxDS1/ E1 + 2x10/ 100BASE- T
Pin 25
Pin 1
D- Type Used on:
SDM 902593, Opt ions 502/
503 paired wit h MUX 902582,
Opt ions 502/ 503
Pin 25
Pin 50
Pin 1
I MN- 903003- E07 June 2008 A- 5
TRuepoi nt

5000 & 4040 Oper at or I nt er f ace


Table A-4. Balanced Tribut aries 9- 16 50- Pin Female SCSI
Pi n Name Di r . Descr i pt i on
1 P1_NC1 - No Connect ion
2 GND - Ground
3 RxRI NG16 Out Tribut ary 16 Rx Out put Ring
4 TxRI NG16 I n Tribut ary 16 Tx I nput Ring
5 GND - Ground
6 RxRI NG15 Out Tribut ary 15 Rx Out put Ring
7 TxRI NG15 I n Tribut ary 15 Tx I nput Ring
8 GND - Ground
9 RxRI NG14 Out Tribut ary 14 Rx Out put Ring
10 TxRI NG14 I n Tribut ary 14 Tx I nput Ring
11 GND - Ground
12 RxRI NG13 Out Tribut ary 13 Rx Out put Ring
13 TxRI NG13 I n Tribut ary 13 Tx I nput Ring
14 GND - Ground
15 RxRI NG12 Out Tribut ary 12 Rx Out put Ring
16 TxRI NG12 I n Tribut ary 12 Tx I nput Ring
17 GND - Ground
18 RxRI NG11 Out Tribut ary 11 Rx Out put Ring
19 TxRI NG11 I n Tribut ary 11 Tx I nput Ring
20 GND - Ground
21 RxRI NG10 Out Tribut ary 10 Rx Out put Ring
22 TxRI NG10 I n Tribut ary 10 Tx I nput Ring
23 GND - Ground
24 RxRI NG9 Out Tribut ary 9 Rx Out put Ring
25 TxRI NG1 I n Tribut ary 9 Tx I nput Ring
Pin 50
SCSI - 2 Used on:
MUX 902582, Opt ions 502/
503/ 511 Mixed Mode
NxDS1/ E1 + 2x10/ 100BASE- T
Pin 26
Pin 1
D- Type Used on:
SDM 902593, Opt ions 502/
503 paired wit h MUX 902582,
Opt ions 502/ 503
Pin 26
Pin 50
Pin 1
A- 6 Har r i s St r at ex Net w or k s

26 P1_NC2 - No Connect ion
27 GND - Ground
28 RxTI P16 Out Tribut ary 16 Rx Out put Tip
29 TxTI P16 I n Tribut ary 16 Tx I nput Tip
30 GND - Ground
31 RxTI P15 Out Tribut ary 15 Rx Out put Tip
32 TxTI P15 I n Tribut ary 15 Tx I nput Tip
33 GND - Ground
34 RxTI P14 Out Tribut ary 14 Rx Out put Tip
35 TxTI P14 I n Tribut ary 14 Tx I nput Tip
36 GND - Ground
37 RxTI P13 Out Tribut ary 13 Rx Out put Tip
38 TxTI P13 I n Tribut ary 13 Tx I nput Tip
39 GND - Ground
40 RxTI P12 Out Tribut ary 12 Rx Out put Tip
41 TxTI P12 I n Tribut ary 12 Tx I nput Tip
42 GND - Ground
43 RxTI P11 Out Tribut ary 11 Rx Out put Tip
44 TxTI P11 I n Tribut ary 11 Tx I nput Tip
45 GND - Ground
46 RxTI P10 Out Tribut ary 10 Rx Out put Tip
47 TxTI P10 I n Tribut ary 10 Tx I nput Tip
48 GND - Ground
49 RxTI P9 Out Tribut ary 9 Rx Out put Tip
50 TxTI P9 I n Tribut ary 9 Tx I nput Tip
Pi n Name Di r . Descr i pt i on
Pin 50
SCSI - 2 Used on:
MUX 902582, Opt ions 502/
503/ 511 Mixed Mode
NxDS1/ E1 + 2x10/ 100BASE- T
Pin 26
Pin 1
D- Type Used on:
SDM 902593, Opt ions 502/
503 paired wit h MUX 902582,
Opt ions 502/ 503
Pin 26
Pin 50
Pin 1
I MN- 903003- E07 June 2008 A- 7
TRuepoi nt

5000 & 4040 Oper at or I nt er f ace


Table A-5. Port s 1 and 2, 10/ 100BASE-T, RJ- 45
1
Pi n Name Di r . Descr i pt i on
1 ETHER_RX1_P I n 10/ 100BASE- T Rx Pos. I nput
2 ETHER_RX1_N I n 10/ 100BASE- T Rx Neg. I nput
3 ETHER_TX1_P Out 10/ 100BASE- T Tx Pos. Out put
4 Tied t o chassis via a 75 ohm and cap
5
6 ETHER_TX1_N Out 10/ 100BASE- T Tx Neg. Out put
7 SHI ELD Tied t o chassis via a 75 ohm and cap
8 GND
9 Green LED - Rx
10
11 Green LED - Act ive
12
1 ETHER_RX2_P I n 10/ 100BASE- T Rx Pos. I nput
2 ETHER_RX2_N I n 10/ 100BASE- T Rx Neg. I nput
3 ETHER_TX2_P Out 10/ 100BASE- T Tx Pos. Out put
4 Tied t o chassis via a 75 ohm and cap
5
6 ETHER_TX2_N Out 10/ 100BASE- T Tx Neg. Out put
7 SHI ELD Tied t o chassis via a 75 ohm and cap
8 GND
9 Green LED - Rx
10
11 Green LED - Act ive
12
1
The 88E6063 includes t he Aut o MDI / MDI X Crossover for each port .
Pin 1 Pin 12
Pin 12 Pin 1
A- 8 Har r i s St r at ex Net w or k s

Sof t w ar e
Once you have upgraded to the new MUX and turned the system back on, you will need
to select the new capacity and configure the tributaries.
Used Capaci t y
1. Login to the Web-CIT.
2. Go to CONFI GURATI ON > SYSTEM. Select the capacity you want from the
USED CAPACI TY drop-down menu. The following table lists the options available.
Table A-6. Mixed Mode Capacit y Opt ions
Please note that if you select a capacity higher than 16 DS1/ E1, such as mix58DS1, you
will only have 16 tributaries and the rest of the capacity will be allocated to the Ethernet
Ports.
Tr i but ar i es
1. Go to CONFI GURATI ON > MUX I NTERFACES > TRI BUTARI ES.
If you have selected a USED CAPACI TY that is less than 16DS1/ E1 then you will
only see that number of tributaries. Otherwise you will see 16 as long as your
software key is not limited to a lower capacity. In the example in Figure A- 3, you
can see the 16 tributaries listed, with 12 being enabled and 4 disabled. The capacity
of the 4 disabled tributaries is then available for ethernet traffic.
MUX Type Avai l abl e Capaci t i es
NxDS1+ 2x10- 100 Base- T mix4DS1, mix 8DS1, mix 12DS1, mix16DS1,
mix29DS1, mix58DS1, mix87DS1, mix100DS1,
100BT+ 4DS1
NxE1+ 2x10- 100 Base- T mix2E1, mix4E1, mix8E1, mix16E1, mix 35E1,
mix50E1, mix75E1, mix100BT+ 4E1
I MN- 903003- E07 June 2008 A- 9
TRuepoi nt

5000 & 4040 Oper at or I nt er f ace


Figure A-3. Tribut ary Ex. 4: NxDS1+ 2x10- 100BASE-T MUX
Et her net Por t s
1. Go to CONFI GURATI ON > MUX I NTERFACES > TRI BUTARI ES.
2. Click on the Ethernet Port tab. The tab will appear similar to the images shown in
Figure A- 4 and Figure A- 5. For definitions of each line, see Table A- 7.
A- 10 Har r i s St r at ex Net w or k s

Figure A-4. Et hernet Port s Tab Example 1
3. Depending on how many tributaries you have enabled, the remaining capacity will
appear in FI XED CAPACI TY. Note that in Figure A- 3, 12 tributaries are enabled.
The remaining capacity can be allocated by using the FI XED CAPACI TY
drop-down menu. If you want traffic to go on both Ports 1 & 2, ENABLE Port
Segregation and then ENABLE the ports.
4. Once you have enabled the ports, you have a choice of defining the traffic. Select the
appropriate number from the FI XED CAPACI TY drop-down menu. If you chose
mix58DS1, for example, and you have enabled all 16 tributaries on the Tributaries
tab, then you will have 42 DS1 allocated to the Ethernet ports. This can then be
distributed evenly between the two ports, or you can put more on one and less on
the other. For example, if the Used Capacity is 29DS1 and 12 tributaries are
enabled, that will leave 17 DS1 available to split between Port 1 and Port 2. I f you
h a ve bot h a loca l a n d a r em ot e s it e, t h e n u m ber of En a b led t r ibu t a r ies
MUST BE THE SAME for t h e m a xim u m n u m ber of t r ibu t a r ies t o
a p p ea r .
5. You also have the ability to disable Autonegotiation in order to select the speed and
duplex status of each Ethernet port. In Figure A- 5, autonegotiation for Port 2 has
been turned off, so the drop-down menus for port speed and duplex speed are
active.
I MN- 903003- E07 June 2008 A- 11
TRuepoi nt

5000 & 4040 Oper at or I nt er f ace


Figure A-5. Et hernet Port s Tab Example 2
For an et hernet connect ion, Harr is St rat ex Net works recommends t hat all
ext ernal device( s) you use support aut o- negot iat ion. I f t he ext ernal
device does not support aut o- negot iat ion, t hen t he ext ernal device
should be configured as 100 Mbit s/ s full- duplex. Also, if only one
connect ion is being made, Harr is St rat ex Net works recommends t hat you
disable Port Segregat ion.
A- 12 Har r i s St r at ex Net w or k s

Table A-7. Et hernet Port s Opt ions
QoS Mappi ng
1. For further segregation, click on the QoS Map tab. The QoS Map allows Ethernet
traffic quality of service priorities to be set. If you want to set these traffic priorities,
make sure that the appropriate priorities are enabled on the Ethernet Ports tab (see
Figure A- 4).
2. To change a priority, select a priority level by clicking on it. The choices are Best
Effort, High, Medium, or Low. A black frame will show which priority has been
chosen (see Figure A- 6). Click within each of the tables to change the priority of
that group, level or port. The color for the group, level or port will change to show
the new priority. To save your changes, press Apply.
Opt i on Act i on
PORT
SEGREGATI ON
Select ENABLE if you want t he port t raffic segregat ed. This set t ing must
be t he same for t he local and remot e sit e.
QOS SCHEDULI NG Select FI XED or WEI GHTED.
ENABLE Select t he appropriat e check box t o ENABLE Port 1 and/ or Port 2.
AUTO NEGOTI ATI ON Select t he appropriat e check box t o DI SABLE Aut o Negot iat ion for Port 1
and/ or Port 2.
SPEED STATUS I f aut onegot iat ion is disabled, select from t he drop- down box eit her 10
Mbps or 100 Mbps as t he port speed.
DUPLEX STATUS I f aut onegot iat ion is disabled, select from t he drop- down box eit her Full
Duplex or Half Duplex.
FI XED CAPACI TY Select a DS1 or E1 capacit y or leave it as DI SABLED. This set t ing must be
t he same for t he local and remot e sit e.
802. 1p QOS ENABLE Select t he appropriat e check box for Port and/ or Port 2. When enabled, an
802. 1p QoS map appears under t he QoS Map t ab allowing different
priorit ies t o be set for each priorit y field level.
I P Traffic Class
a
QOS
ENABLE
a. This can be referred t o as I P DiffServ as well.
Select t he appropriat e check box for Port 1 and/ or Port 2. When enabled,
an I P Traffic Class QoS map will appear under t he Qos Map t ab allowing
different priorit ies t o be set for different groups of I P classes.
Prefer 802. 1p Over
I P Traffic Class
Select t he appropriat e check box for Port 1 and/ or Port 2. This set s t he
order of preference when priorit izing Et hernet t raffic.
I MN- 903003- E07 June 2008 A- 13
TRuepoi nt

5000 & 4040 Oper at or I nt er f ace


Table A-8. Priorit y Tables in t he QoS Map
Figure A-6. QoS Map Tab
Pr i or i t y Tabl e Descr i pt i on
Et hernet Port Displays when one of t he Et hernet port s has been enabled. By highlight ing
Port 1, for example, you designat e t hat t he t raffic on Port 1 will always t ake
priorit y over t he t raffic on Port 2.
802. 1p Displays when 802. 1p QoS is enabled for one of t he Et hernet port s and works
at t he media access cont rol ( MAC) framing layer. There are eight levels ( 0- 7)
of priorit y t hat can be set . For example, you might want t o give your
net work- crit ical t raffic a priorit y of 7, while st reaming mult imedia might get
a priorit y of 3.
I Pv4/ I Pv6 Displays when I PTC QoS is enabled for one of t he Et hernet port s and works
at t he I P packet layer. This gives one group of I P classes a higher priorit y over
anot her group. The t able segment s I P classes int o 64 groups t hat can have
different priorit ies.
A- 14 Har r i s St r at ex Net w or k s

I MN- 903003- E07 June 2008 B- 1
Appendi x B. Et her net
Thr oughput Measur ement
Pr ocedur e
I nt r oduct i on
The following test procedure describes how to measure the layer 3 throughput over a
single hop of TRuepoint 5000 using the NetPerf application. This procedure is
intended for a field technician that does not have the recommended Smart Bit test set
to properly measure the layer 2 throughputs. It is important to note that only layer 2
throughput measurements will provide accurate measurement since a receiver is not
required to generate data acknowledgement at this layer.
The NetPerf measurement set up is described below. Only one PC is required at each
end of the hop. To simplify the number of PC configuration changes Windows XP has
to be used.
Pr e -r e qu is it es : 2 PCs wit h Win d ows XP.
The recommended soft ware for TRuepoint is 4. 6. 3 or higher.
B- 2 Har r i s St r at ex Net w or k s

Figure B-1. Set - up
Netperf is a benchmark application that can be used to measure various aspects of
networking performance. The primary focus is bulk (unidirectional) data transfer and
request/ response performance using either TCP or UDP. The available tests described
in this procedure include:
TCP and UDP unidirectional transfer and request/ response over IPv4 and IPv6
using the Sockets interface.
Netperf is designed around a basic client-server model. There are two executables:
netperf and netserver. With this procedure, only the netperf program will be executed
while the netserver program is invoked by the remote system's end. Executing netperf
corresponds to the establishment of a control connection to the remote system.
The download location for Netperf is http:/ / www.netperf.org/ netperf/
DownloadNetperf.html.
I MN- 903003- E07 June 2008 B- 3
TRuepoi nt

5000 & 4040 Oper at or I nt er f ace


Conf i gur i ng I P addr essi ng and f l ow cont r ol
on PC s
Pr ocedur e t o set an I P addr ess
1. On the near end PC Desktop right click on the My Network Places icon. You
should see a window similar to Figure B- 2.
Figure B-2. My Net wor k Places
2. Select Properties. The following window should appear as shown in Figure B- 3.
Select Local Area Connection and right click on it.
Figure B-3. Local Area Connect ion
3. Select Properties and the window shown in Figure B- 4 should appear.
B- 4 Har r i s St r at ex Net w or k s

Figure B-4. Local Area Connect ion Propert ies
4. Select Internet Protocol and click on Properties. Figure B- 5 should appear.
5. Configure a manual IP address as shown in Figure B- 5 and press OK.
Figure B-5. I nt er net Prot ocol Propert ies
I MN- 903003- E07 June 2008 B- 5
TRuepoi nt

5000 & 4040 Oper at or I nt er f ace


No DNS server I P addresses are required for Net Perf t est ing.
Pr ocedur e t o set t he f l ow cont r ol
1. Go back to the General tab and select Configure.
Figure B-6. Local Area Connect ion Propert ies Example 2
2. Select the Advanced tab as shown in Figure B- 7.
B- 6 Har r i s St r at ex Net w or k s

Figure B-7. Et hernet Proper t ies
3. Make sure that Auto Detect (XP) or Auto Mode (2000) is selected for the Duplex
Mode.
Figure B-8. Et hernet Proper t ies Advanced Tab
4. Click on OK to configure the IP address. This address corresponds to the PC
attached to the near end TRuepoint 5000.
5. Verify if this IP address is correctly set by clicking the Windows Start Button
(Windows flag) and by clicking Run as shown in Figure B- 9. Type cmd in the box
and then press OK.
I MN- 903003- E07 June 2008 B- 7
TRuepoi nt

5000 & 4040 Oper at or I nt er f ace


Figure B-9. Run
6. A DOS Windows should appear on the screen. Type the ip con fig/ a ll command in
the DOS windows and the configured IP address should appear.
Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection:
Connection-specific DNS Suffix.:
Description...........: 3Com 3C920 Integrated Fast Ethernet
Controller (3C905C-TX Compatible)
Physical Address.........: 00-0B-DB-D8-2F-1C
Dhcp Enabled...........: No
Autoconfiguration Enabled....: No
IP Address............: 192.168.0.100
Subnet Mask...........: 255.255.255.0
Default Gateway.........: 192.168.0.101
The IP address and flow control of the near end PC are now set. The same steps
must be taken to set the IP address of the far end TRuepoint 5000 as described
here.
B- 8 Har r i s St r at ex Net w or k s

Figure B-10. Far End I nt ernet Prot ocol Propert ies
I MN- 903003- E07 June 2008 B- 9
TRuepoi nt

5000 & 4040 Oper at or I nt er f ace


Pi ng r emot e PC
The second step consists in connecting a PC at each end of the hop.
Figure B-11. Connect ing a PC at each hop
The TRuepoint 5000 Ethernet port 1 LED should flash green. The connectivity between
the near ends PC and the far ends PC must now be tested. This can be done by pinging
the far end PC.
1. Click the Windows Start Button (Windows flag) and then on Run. See Figure B- 9.
Type cmd in the box and then press OK.
2. At the near end site type the following command in the DOS window (see Figure
B- 12). A r ep ly fr om t h e fa r en d s it e s h ou ld be r ece ived if t h e s e t u p is
cor r ect .
B- 10 Har r i s St r at ex Net w or k s

Figure B-12. DOS window command
Measur i ng t hr oughput w i t h t he Net per f
ut i l i t y
No ot her applicat ion should be running on bot h PCs during a Net perf t est .
1. On the far end PC that is running the netperf server, start the server by this Netperf
command line:
C:\ netperf > netserver-a4.exe
Figure B-13. Net perf Command Line Example
2. On the near end PC that will run the netperf client, start the client by one of the
following:
Netperf command line:
C:\ NetPerf1>netperf-a4.exe -H 192.168.0.101 -v 2 -t TCP_STREAM -l 60 -- -s
17520 -S 17520
where
I MN- 903003- E07 June 2008 B- 11
TRuepoi nt

5000 & 4040 Oper at or I nt er f ace


H is the target machine IP address
-v 2 specifies a high level of verbose
-t specifies the test name (TCP_STREAM or UDP_STREAM)
-s is the local socket (send/ receive) buffer size. Often, this will affect the
advertised and/ or effective TCP or other window, but on some platforms it may
not. This explains why it is important to set the proper TCP/ IP window register.
By default, Netperf use the system's default socket buffer sizes.
-S is the remote socket (send/ receive) buffer size. Often, this will affect the
advertised and/ or effective TCP or other window, but on some platforms it may
not. While the historic expectation is that setting the socket buffer size has a
direct effect on say the TCP window, today that may not hold true for all stacks.
Further, while the historic expectation is that the value specified in a
setsockopt() call will be the value returned via a getsockopt() call, at least one
stack is known to deliberately ignore history. This explains why it is important
to set the proper TCP/ IP window register. By default, Netperf uses the system's
default socket buffer sizes.
The suggest ed synt ax omit s t he following flags t hat should be at least
known by t he user.
-m specifies the size of the buffer passed-in to the send calls of a TCP or
UDP_STREAM test. Note that this may have only an indirect effect on the size
of the packets sent over the network, and certain Layer 4 protocols do not
preserve or enforce message boundaries, so setting -m for the send size does not
necessarily mean the receiver will receive that many bytes at any one time. This
flag will indicate how many bytes will be transmitted before NetPerf sends the
same byte pattern again. The default local send socket buffer size for the
connection is either the system's default or the value set via the -s option.
-M is the size of the buffer passed-in to the recv calls of a _STREAM test. This
will be an upper bound on the number of bytes received per receive call.
The remote receive socket buffer size for the data connection is either the system's
default or the value set via the -S option
-l The testlen option controls the length of any iteration of the requested
test. A positive value for testlen will run an iteration of the test for at least testlen
seconds. A negative value for testlen will run an iteration for the absolute value
of testlen transactions for a UDP or TCP _STREAM test. Default value for the
recommended Netperf syntax is 10 sec.
-w The <sizespec> option controls the number of buffers in the send (first or
only value) and or receive (second or only value) buffer rings, Netperf does not
continuously send or receive from a single buffer. Instead it rotates through a
ring of buffers. [Default: One more than the size of the send or receive socket
buffer sizes (-s and/ or -S options) divided by the send -m or receive -M buffer
size respectively].
B- 12 Har r i s St r at ex Net w or k s

Example:
To have the real throughput the following formula must be apply (see Net perf
t hroughput VS Et hernet t hroughput ).
Real_Throughput = Netperf_Throughput * 1538 Bytes/ 1460 Bytes
= 94.24 bits/ sec * 1.0534
= 99.27 Mbits/ sec 100Mbits/ sec
Net per f t hr oughput VS Et her net t hr oughput
This is the representation of an Ethernet frame (802.3):
Figure B-14. Et hernet Frame
The maximum Ethernet frame is 1518 bytes. This is when the User Data field is used to
its fullest capacity (1460 bytes).
During transmission, a preamble of 8 bytes is added by the NIC card for
synchronization reasons, and an IPG Interpacket Gap of 12 bytes is also added to
the Ethernet frame. The IPG allows many users or applications to send traffic on a
network at approximately the same time.
Table B- 1 presents these extra bits added to an Ethernet packet and compares the
time it takes to transmit these bits depending on whether you are using Fast Ethernet
or Ethernet:
I MN- 903003- E07 June 2008 B- 13
TRuepoi nt

5000 & 4040 Oper at or I nt er f ace


Table B-1. Ext ra Bit s
When measuring throughput, this information needs to be considered.
The table below presents results measured by SmartBits 2000 on a TRuepoint 5000
hop with 16DS1 + 2x10/ 100BT module cards, and demonstrates why measuring
100Mbps is nearly impossible.
The port segregation feature is enabled. This feature requires a 4 byte tag to indicate
which port is being used to send the data. This tag does not imply interoperability
issues with external equipment, since it will be disregarded if not recognized.
Table B-2. Smart Bit s 2000 Example
Column Description:
A - Ethernet frame size
B - Ethernet Frame size with preamble of 8 bytes and IPG of 12 bytes
C - Frame size including 4 byte tag for the Port Segregation feature
D - On a 100Mbps line, the maximum amount of packets that can be transmitted is:
100 Mbp/ sec = Frame bytes/ Packet x 8 bits/ byte x N Packets/ sec
=> N =
Example => We need to consider the actual fr a m e size being transmitted; this will
correspond to colu m n C. Lets calculate using the largest possible frame size:
=> N = = 8106 Packets
Rat e Pr eambl e Mi ni mum Gap bet w een
t w o pack et s
Tot al
( us) ( Byt e) ( Bit ) ( us) ( Byt e) ( Bit ) ( us) ( Byt e) ( Bit )
100 Mb/ s 0. 64 8 64 0. 96 12 96 1. 6 20 160
10 Mb/ s 6. 4 8 64 9. 6 12 96 16 20 160
A B C D E F
Et hernet
St andard
Frame
Packet Lengt h
Transmit t ed
St andard Frame
I ncludes
8 byt es - Preamble
12 byt es - I PG
Transmit t ed
TRuepoint Frame
I ncludes
4 byt es - Segregat ion
TRuepoint
Maximum
Throughput
100 MB/ s
Theoret ical
Calculat ed
Maximum
Throughput
Smart Bit s
Measured
Throughput
Byt e Byt e Byt e Pkt / sec Mb/ s Mb/ s
64 84 88 142045 95. 45 95. 45
128 148 152 82236 97. 36 97. 37
256 276 280 44642 98. 56 98. 57
512 532 536 23320 99. 24 99. 26
1024 1044 1048 11927 99. 61 99. 67
1280 1300 1304 9585 99. 68 99. 70
1518 1538 1542 8106 99. 73 ( max) 99. 72
8
10 100
6

Frame
8 1542
10 100
6

B- 14 Har r i s St r at ex Net w or k s

E The theoretical throughput corresponds to:
Example => Lets calculate using the largest possible frame size:
= 99.73 Mbps
F Measured Data
The values in column F will differ if the method of test is different. If using an
application tool such as Netperf, the measured throughput will be lower. Figure B- 14
clearly segments the different fields. An application tool measures the effective
throughput of the User Data field, or in other words the payload.
The TCP/ IP Maximum Segment Size (MSS) is the largest amount of data, specified in
bytes, that a computer or communications device can handle in a single,
un-fragmented piece. The default MSS is 1460 byte.
In conclusion the maximum TCP/ IP throughput achievable with any benchmark tool
(ex: Netperf) is:
1460 byte/ 1538 byte * 99.73 Mb/ s= 94.62 Mb/ s
Since this value depends on many parameters like the processing power of the CPU, the
Ethernet line Interface card, etc., the Netperf test objective should be around 90 Mb/ s.
byte bit Packet byte Frame Packets N Throughput / 8 / sec / =
byte bit bytes Packets Throughput / 8 1538 sec / 8106 =
I MN- 903003- E07 June 2008 1
I ndex
A
about - ii
alarm menu 6- 2
alarms 5- 14
B
bandwidt h 3- 17
BER Test ing 5- 7
C
Capacit y
maximum 3- 15
used capacit y 3- 15
configurat ion menu 6- 8
Configurat ion Transfer Ut ilit y 4- 18
descript ion 2- 4
cont act dat a
St r at ex Net works - iii
cont rol menu 6- 7
E
et hernet port s 3- 26, A- 10
Event Log Viewer 5- 7
F
FarScan
descript ion 2- 3
H
Hand- Held Terminal
connect ing 3- 2
descript ion 2- 1
operat ing 3- 4
High Level Mux loopback t est 5- 3
I
I ndicat or Light s 5- 1
L
loopback t est
high level Mux 5- 3
modem I F 5- 3
t ribut ary 5- 3
M
Microwave Soft ware Upgrade Ut ilit y
descript ion 2- 4
direct flash upgrade 4- 6
ESCAN upgrade 4- 10
inst allat ion 4- 2
single- host upgrade 4- 4
Modem I F loopback t est 5- 3
Modulat ion
QAM 8- 4
QPSK 8- 4
t rellis- coded 8- 5
MUX, Tribut aries, See also Tribut aries A- 1
N
NE address 3- 6
Net com prot ocol 2- 2
Net work Management 3- 40
O
opt ional cards 3- 37
P
PCR
descript ion 2- 3
performance menu 6- 6
prot ect ion 3- 16
R
rout ing 3- 43
S
Securit y 3- 30
st r ong securit y opt ion 3- 32
SNMP 3- 45
Soft ware Keys
descript ion 2- 4
uploading 4- 16
soft ware menus

2 Har r i s St r at ex Net w or k s
alarm 6- 2
configurat ion 6- 8
cont rol 6- 7
main 6- 1
performance 6- 6
st at us 6- 4
st at us menu 6- 4
St r at ex Net works
cont act dat a - iii
T
TPC Mode 3- 28
t r ademarks - ii
Transmit t er Swit ching 3- 36
Tr ibut aries
MUX A- 1
t r ibut aries 3- 21
21E1 MUX 3- 23
Add- Dr op MUX 3- 27
NxE1/ NxDS1+ 2x10- 100BASE- T MUX 3-
24
Tribut ary loopback t est s 5- 3
U
Upgrades
upgrade kit s 4- 2, 1- 1
using t he MSUU 4- 2
user aut horizat ion 3- 30
V
VT- 100 emulat ion
connect ing 3- 2
descript ion 2- 1
operat ing 3- 4
W
wayside 3- 21
Web- CI T
connect ing 3- 8
descript ion 2- 1
operat ing 3- 11

You might also like